WO2022064904A1 - Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device - Google Patents

Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022064904A1
WO2022064904A1 PCT/JP2021/030326 JP2021030326W WO2022064904A1 WO 2022064904 A1 WO2022064904 A1 WO 2022064904A1 JP 2021030326 W JP2021030326 W JP 2021030326W WO 2022064904 A1 WO2022064904 A1 WO 2022064904A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mass
group
compound
coloring composition
parts
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/030326
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
啓之 山本
寛晃 小川
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN202180062346.2A priority Critical patent/CN116249938A/en
Priority to JP2022551196A priority patent/JPWO2022064904A1/ja
Publication of WO2022064904A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022064904A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/032Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
    • G03F7/033Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders the binders being polymers obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. vinyl polymers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a coloring composition. More specifically, the present invention relates to a coloring composition used for forming green pixels of a color filter and the like. The present invention also relates to a cured film, a structure, a color filter and a display device using a coloring composition.
  • color filters are generally used for colorizing displayed images. Further, in a color filter, an attempt is made to adjust the spectroscopy by using a plurality of pigments in combination.
  • the coloring composition for forming green pixels of the color filter contains a green coloring agent as a coloring agent.
  • a green coloring agent as a coloring agent.
  • Examples 1 to 7 of Patent Document 1 use a coloring composition containing a coloring agent containing Color Index Pigment Green 7 and Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator to be green. It is described to form a pixel.
  • a color filter has pixels of a plurality of colors.
  • Such a color filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming a pattern of coloring compositions for forming pixels of each color to form pixels of each color.
  • a color filter may be formed on a member having low heat resistance (for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element). Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
  • a member having low heat resistance for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element. Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
  • the present invention provides: ⁇ 1> A coloring composition containing a colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the colorant comprises Color Index Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant.
  • the coloring composition exists in a wavelength range in which the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.2 is 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less, when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. Coloring composition.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is a repeating unit having a polyether structure, a repeating unit having a novolak structure, or a repeating unit having a (meth) acrylic structure.
  • ⁇ 5> The coloring composition according to ⁇ 3> or ⁇ 4>, wherein the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring in the main chain structure.
  • ⁇ 6> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group.
  • ⁇ 7> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 1% by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition exists in each of the wavelength range in which the absorbance is 0.2 in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 520 nm or less and the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1.
  • the yellow colorant includes any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, which comprises at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 129, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 185.
  • the coloring composition according to one. ⁇ 11> The colorant is further described in any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, further comprising at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Green 36, Color Index Pigment Green 58, and Color Index Pigment Green 59.
  • Coloring composition ⁇ 12> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>, wherein the content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 15% by mass or more.
  • ⁇ 13> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
  • ⁇ 14> A cured film obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 15> A structure having a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel, and the green pixel is obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 16> The color filter having the cured film according to ⁇ 14>.
  • ⁇ 17> A display device having the cured film according to ⁇ 14>.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed.
  • the present invention can also provide a cured film, a structure, a color filter and a display device using the coloring composition.
  • the notation not describing substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group).
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the term "exposure” includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure generally includes an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, active rays such as electron beams, or radiation.
  • the numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the total solid content means the total mass of all the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • “(meth) acrylate” represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either
  • “(meth) acrylic” represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either.
  • Allyl represents both allyl and / or methacrylic
  • “ (meth) acryloyl ” represents both / or either acryloyl and methacrylic acid.
  • the term "process” is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene-equivalent values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the colorant comprises Color Index Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant.
  • the coloring composition is characterized in that the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.2 exists in the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed.
  • a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower preferably 120 ° C. or lower, more preferably 100 ° C. or lower
  • the coloring composition has the above-mentioned specific spectral characteristics. Due to the interaction between the pigments, heat is easily transferred, and when the coloring composition is heated and cured, the curing of the coloring composition proceeds rapidly, and as a result, the coloring composition is sufficiently cured even when heated at a relatively low temperature. It is presumed that a cured film can be formed. Therefore, according to the coloring composition of the present invention, it is presumed that a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed can be formed.
  • this coloring composition forms a cured film suitable for green pixels having spectral characteristics excellent in color separation from other colors such as red and blue. can do.
  • the absorbance A ⁇ at a certain wavelength ⁇ is defined by the following equation (Ab1).
  • a ⁇ -log (T ⁇ / 100) ...
  • a ⁇ is the absorbance at the wavelength ⁇ , and T ⁇ is the transmittance (%) at the wavelength ⁇ .
  • the absorbance value may be a value measured in a solution state or a value of a cured film formed by using a coloring composition.
  • a coloring composition When measuring the absorbance in the state of a film, apply the coloring composition on a glass substrate by a method such as spin coating, dry at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate or the like, and then use an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. Then, the film was exposed under the conditions of a light illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 , then heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to room temperature to obtain a film having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m. It is preferable to measure using (cured film). Absorbance can be measured using a conventionally known spectrophotometer.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention has a wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less in which the absorbance is 0.2 when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention exists in each of the wavelength range in which the absorbance is 0.2 in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 520 nm or less and the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. Is preferable.
  • the wavelength on the short wavelength side (hereinafter, also referred to as wavelength ⁇ 1) at which the absorbance is 0.2 is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 515 nm or less from the viewpoint of color separation, and is preferably 475 nm or more and 500 nm or less. It is more preferably present in the range, further preferably present in the wavelength range of 480 nm or more and 495 nm or less, and particularly preferably present in the wavelength range of 480 nm or more and 490 nm or less.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side having an absorbance of 0.2 (hereinafter, also referred to as wavelength ⁇ 2) is preferably present in the wavelength range of 550 nm or more and 600 nm or less from the viewpoint of color separation, and has a wavelength of 555 nm or more and 600 nm or less. It is more preferably present in the range, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 570 nm or more and 590 nm or less.
  • the wavelength difference ( ⁇ 2- ⁇ 1) between the wavelength ⁇ 2 and the wavelength ⁇ 1 is preferably 40 to 120 nm, more preferably 60 to 110 nm, and even more preferably 80 to 100 nm from the viewpoint of color separation.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably has the minimum absorbance in the wavelength range of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm, and has the absorbance in the wavelength range of 505 nm or more and 540 nm or less, among the absorbances for light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm. It is more preferable to have a minimum value, and it is further preferable to have a minimum value of absorbance in the wavelength range of 515 nm or more and 530 nm or less.
  • the wavelength showing the minimum value of the absorbance among the absorbances for light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is also referred to as a wavelength ⁇ min.
  • the wavelength difference between the wavelength ⁇ min and the wavelength ⁇ 1 (wavelength ⁇ min- ⁇ 1) is preferably 15 to 60 nm, more preferably 15 to 55 nm, and further preferably 30 to 50 nm from the viewpoint of color separation. preferable.
  • the wavelength difference between the wavelength ⁇ 2 and the wavelength ⁇ min (wavelength ⁇ 2-wavelength ⁇ min) is preferably 20 to 80 nm, more preferably 30 to 70 nm, and 40 to 60 nm from the viewpoint of color separation. Is even more preferable.
  • the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 65% or more. It is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 75% or more, and even more preferably 75% or more. Further, the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 65% or more, still more preferably 70% or more.
  • the transmittance of the film with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 2% or less.
  • the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 1% or less.
  • the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less is preferably 60% or less, more preferably 50% or less, still more preferably 40% or less.
  • the content of Color Index Pigment Green 7 in the total solid content of the coloring composition the type and content of the yellow colorant, and the color in the colorant. It can be appropriately adjusted by changing the ratio of the index pigment green 7 and the yellow colorant, the content of the colorant in the coloring composition, and the like.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter, and more preferably can be used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a display device, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter for a display device.
  • the type of the display device is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a display device having an organic semiconductor element as a light source such as an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a coloring composition for a solid-state image sensor. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process.
  • forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process means that all the steps of forming a cured film using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower.
  • the thickness of the cured film and pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 1.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 1.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the line width (pattern size) of the pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit is preferably 7.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 4.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2.25 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 2.75 ⁇ m or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent.
  • the colorant used in the coloring composition of the present invention includes a Color Index (CI) Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant.
  • C. I. Pigment Green 7 is a green colorant.
  • the average primary particle size of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 30 to 200 nm, more preferably 30 to 150 nm, and even more preferably 30 to 100 nm.
  • the primary particle size of a pigment such as Pigment Green 7 can be determined from an image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle diameter in the present specification is an arithmetic average value of the primary particle diameter for the primary particles of 400 pigments. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without aggregation.
  • the yellow colorant may be either a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a pigment.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 30 to 200 nm, more preferably 30 to 150 nm, and even more preferably 30 to 100 nm.
  • yellow colorant examples include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35: 1,36, 36: 1,37,37: 1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97, 98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179, 180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236 and the like can be mentioned.
  • a nickel azobarbituric acid complex having the following structure can also be used.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, and paragraph numbers 0011 to 0062 and 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 are described.
  • X 1 to X 16 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP1) include the compound described in paragraph No. 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
  • Y1 to Y3 independently represent halogen atoms.
  • n and m represent integers of 0 to 6, and p represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • (N + m) is 1 or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP2) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
  • the yellow colorant is C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably at least one selected from C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 and C.I. I. It is more preferable that it is at least one selected from Pigment Yellow 185, and from the viewpoint of light resistance, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 is even more preferred.
  • the yellow colorant is C.I. I. It is also preferable to use Pigment Yellow 185.
  • the yellow colorant may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When only one kind of yellow colorant is used, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be improved. When two or more yellow colorants are used in combination, it is easy to adjust the color.
  • Preferred embodiments of the yellow colorant used in the present invention include the following aspects Y1, aspect Y2, and aspect Y3. From the viewpoint of suppressing color mixing and storage stability, the following aspect Y1 is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of color separation from other colors, the following aspect Y3 is also preferable.
  • Embodiment Y1 The yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. A mode in which only Pigment Yellow 150 is used.
  • the yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I.
  • C.I. I When only Pigment Yellow 150 is used, C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Yellow 150 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more. Further, the yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. When only Pigment Yellow 185 is used, C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Yellow 185 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
  • yellow colorant other than Pigment Yellow 150 examples include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 and the like, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Yellow 185.
  • the content of yellow colorants other than Pigment Yellow 150 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 125 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention further comprises C.I. I.
  • a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7 (hereinafter, also referred to as another green colorant) can be contained.
  • green colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Green 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66 and the like.
  • halogens having an average of 10 to 14 halogen atoms in one molecule, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms.
  • Halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments can also be mentioned. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
  • examples of other green colorants include the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester described in International Publication No. 2012/102395 as a ligand, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No.
  • Examples thereof include the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, and the compounds described in JP-A-2019-038958. Further, as another green colorant, the core-shell type dye described in JP-A-2020-07695 can also be used.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Green 59, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 is more preferred.
  • Preferred embodiments of the green colorant used in the present invention include the following embodiments G1 and G2, and the following embodiments G1 are preferable from the viewpoint of color separability.
  • Aspect G1 The green colorant is substantially C.I. I. A mode in which only Pigment Green 7 is used.
  • the green colorant is substantially C.I. I.
  • the case where only Pigment Green 7 is used means that C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Green 7 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
  • green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 include C.I. I. Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Green 59, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 is more preferred.
  • Other green colorants are C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 only is preferred. That is, the green colorant of the above aspect G2 is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It is preferably composed of Pigment Green 36. It should be noted that the green colorant is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When it is composed of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It means that the total content with the pigment green 36 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
  • the green colorant of the above aspect G2 is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It is also preferable that it is composed of Pigment Green 59. According to this aspect, the peak transmittance is increased, and a cured film having higher brightness can be formed. It should be noted that the green colorant is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When it is composed of Pigment Green 59, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It means that the total content with Pigment Green 59 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
  • C.I. I The content of green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 5000 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 3000 parts by mass, and further preferably 0.1 to 2000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. , 0.1 to 500 parts by mass is even more preferable, 10 to 300 parts by mass is even more preferable, and 25 to 200 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
  • C.I. I. As a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. When using Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Green 36 is C.I. I.
  • Pigment Green 7 It is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 300 parts by mass, and further preferably 25 to 200 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • C.I. I. As a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7, C.I. I.
  • the content of Pigment Green 59 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 5000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 25 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 3000 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 1500 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a coloring agent other than the green coloring agent and the yellow coloring agent (hereinafter, also referred to as other coloring agents).
  • the content of the other colorants in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less, further preferably 10% by mass or less, and from the viewpoint of color separability. It is particularly preferred that it contains substantially no other colorants.
  • the colorant used in the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain another colorant, the content of the other colorant in the colorant is less than 0.5% by mass. It is preferably less than 0.1% by mass, and more preferably does not contain other colorants.
  • colorants examples include chromatic colorants such as red colorants, blue colorants, purple colorants, and orange colorants.
  • the other colorant may be a pigment or a dye. Pigments and dyes may be used in combination. Examples of the pigment include those shown below.
  • an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP2012-247591A and paragraph numbers 0047 of JP2011-157478A.
  • a red colorant As a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838.
  • red colorant a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. You can also.
  • the phthalocyanine compound described in International Publication No. 2020/174991 can also be used.
  • dyes there are no particular restrictions on the dye, and known dyes can be used.
  • pyrazole azo system anilino azo system, triarylmethane system, anthraquinone system, anthrapyridone system, benzylidene system, oxonol system, pyrazolotriazole azo system, pyridone azo system, cyanine system, phenothiazine system, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine system, xanthene system
  • phthalocyanine-based benzopyran-based, indigo-based, and pyrromethene-based dyes.
  • the dyes include a thiazole compound described in JP2012-158649A, an azo compound described in JP2011-1844943, an azo compound described in JP2011-145540, and a Korean published patent No. 10.
  • -The triarylmethane dye polymer described in JP-A-2020-0028160 and the xanthene compound described in JP-A-2020-117638 can also be preferably used.
  • the other colorant may be a dye multimer.
  • the dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
  • the plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may have the same dye structure or may have different dye structures.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less.
  • Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, International Publication No. 2016/031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
  • the content of the colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 15% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 25% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, still more preferably 40% by mass or less.
  • the content of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 1 to 80% by mass, more preferably 3 to 80% by mass, and further preferably 5 to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of achieving both brightness and color separation. It is more preferably 15 to 65% by mass, and particularly preferably 25 to 50% by mass.
  • the content of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass.
  • the content of the yellow colorant in the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 85% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and 30 to 65% by mass. Is even more preferable.
  • the content of the yellow colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and more preferably 10 to 30% by mass. More preferred.
  • the content of the yellow colorant is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 240 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
  • C.I. in the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 85% by mass, more preferably 10 to 75% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 65% by mass.
  • the content of Pigment Yellow 150 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass.
  • the content of Pigment Yellow 150 is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 240 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
  • C.I. I. When Pigment Yellow 185 was used, C.I. I.
  • the content of Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 0.1 to 85% by mass, more preferably 10 to 75% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 65% by mass.
  • the content of Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass.
  • the content of Pigment Yellow 185 is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 240 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more.
  • the total content of Pigment Green 7 and the yellow colorant is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass. It is even more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, even more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the total content with Pigment Yellow 150 is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, further preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. %, More preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the total content with Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, further preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. %, More preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is further described in C.I. I.
  • a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7 is contained, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, Yellow Colorant and C.I. I.
  • the total content of the green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and even more preferably 90 to 100% by mass. ..
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment (such as CI Pigment Green 7) in a coloring composition or for a binder.
  • the resin mainly used to disperse the pigment in the coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant.
  • the resin as a dispersant can be used in the preparation of the pigment dispersion liquid.
  • such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such an application.
  • the resin having a cyclic ether group is a component corresponding to the compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 1,000,000 or less, further preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, further preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
  • the resin examples include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene ether phosphine oxide.
  • examples thereof include resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins.
  • the resin described in paragraphs 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689 the resin described in paragraph numbers 0022-0071 of JP-A-2018-010856, the resin described in JP-A-2017-057256, and the resin.
  • a resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in the publication can be used.
  • the resin used in the present invention may have an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like. These acid groups may be only one kind or two or more kinds.
  • the resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group in the side chain.
  • the resin having an acid group can also be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant.
  • the acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the resin having an acid group may have a repeating unit derived from a maleimide compound.
  • the maleimide compound include N-alkylmaleimide and N-arylmaleimide.
  • the repeating unit derived from the maleimide compound include a repeating unit represented by the formula (C-mi).
  • Rmi represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Rmi is preferably an aryl group.
  • the resin having an acid group is a repeating compound derived from a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer"). It is also preferable that the resin contains a unit.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-209760A can be referred to, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of the resin containing the repeating unit derived from the ether dimer include a resin having the following structure.
  • Me represents a methyl group.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, and has both a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group.
  • a polymer is more preferable, and a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group is further preferable.
  • a resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less.
  • resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by Big Chemie), Solspers 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, Examples thereof include 56000, 7100 (above, manufactured by Japan Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (above, manufactured by BASF) and the like.
  • the resin having a basic group is described in the block copolymers (B) described in paragraphs 0063 to 0112 of JP2014-219665A and paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP-A-2018-156021.
  • the block copolymer A1 and the vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP-A-2019-184763 can also be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group, respectively. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved.
  • the content of the resin having a basic group may be 20 to 500 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group. It is preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass.
  • the resin used in the present invention may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • Commercially available products of resins having a polymerizable group include Dianal NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (polyurethane acrylate oligomer containing carboxy group, Diamond Shamrock Co., Ltd.), Viscort R-264, KS.
  • Resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Praxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Co., Ltd.), Ebeclyl3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Co., Ltd.), Acrycure Examples thereof include RD-F8 (manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.) and DP-1305 (manufactured by Fujifilm Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
  • the resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin b1 containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III).
  • a resin b1 containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III) By using the resin b1, the curability at a low temperature is excellent, and a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature. Furthermore, it is easy to form a cured film having excellent spectral characteristics.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15.
  • the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula (III) include ethylene oxide of paracumylphenol or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the ratio of the repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III) in all the repeating units of the resin b1 is preferably 1 to 99 mol%.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 mol% or more, further preferably 5 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 95 mol% or less, further preferably 90 mol% or less.
  • the resin b1 may further contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III).
  • the resin b1 can contain repeating units derived from (meth) acrylate, and preferably contains repeating units derived from alkyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety of the alkyl (meth) acrylate is preferably 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 8, and even more preferably 3 to 6.
  • Preferred specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include n-butyl (meth) acrylate and the like. It is also preferable that the resin b1 contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin having a repeating unit containing a blocked isocyanate group (hereinafter, also referred to as resin BI). According to this aspect, more excellent low temperature curability can be obtained, and a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature.
  • resin BI a resin having a repeating unit containing a blocked isocyanate group
  • the blocked isocyanate group of the resin BI is preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat, and more preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat of 70 to 150 ° C. preferable.
  • Examples of the blocked isocyanate group include a group having a structure in which the isocyanate group is chemically protected by a blocking agent.
  • the blocked isocyanate group is a group having a structure in which the isocyanate group is protected by a compound called a blocking agent, and although it does not show reactivity as an isocyanate group at room temperature (for example, 10 to 30 ° C.), it is heated or the like. It is a group having a structure in which an isocyanate group is generated by desorbing a blocking agent from a blocked isocyanate group.
  • the blocked isocyanate group of the resin BI is more preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat at 70 to 150 ° C. That is, the isocyanate formation temperature (desorption temperature of the blocking agent) of the blocked isocyanate group is preferably 70 to 150 ° C.
  • the lower limit of the isocyanate formation temperature is preferably 75 ° C. or higher, more preferably 80 ° C. or higher, from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the upper limit of the isocyanate formation temperature is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of curability.
  • Examples of the blocking agent that protects the isocyanate group of the blocked isocyanate group include an oxime compound, a lactam compound, a phenol compound, an alcohol compound, an amine compound, an active methylene compound, a pyrazole compound, a mercaptan compound, an imidazole compound, and an imide compound.
  • an oxime compound, a lactam compound, an active methylene compound and a pyrazole compound are preferable, an oxime compound, an active methylene compound and a pyrazole compound are more preferable, and an oxime compound is further preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a resin as a dispersant.
  • the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more is preferable, and substantially, when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • a resin consisting only of an acid group is more preferable.
  • the acid group of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups.
  • a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% is preferable when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the dispersant examples include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamide amines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, modified poly (meth) acrylates, (meth). Acrylic copolymer, naphthalene sulfonic acid formarin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like can be mentioned.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer based on its structure.
  • the polymer dispersant is adsorbed on the surface of particles such as pigments and acts to prevent reaggregation. Therefore, end-modified polymers, graft-type polymers, and block-type polymers having anchor sites on the surface of particles such as pigments can be mentioned as preferable structures. Further, the dispersant described in paragraphs 0028 to 0124 of JP-A-2011-070156 and the dispersant described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also preferably used.
  • a graft copolymer can also be used as the dispersant.
  • the description in paragraphs 0131 to 0160 of JP2012-137564A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • an oligoimine-based copolymer containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain can also be used.
  • the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0174 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and this content is incorporated in the present specification.
  • a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion can also be used.
  • resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers).
  • specific examples of the dendrimer include the polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962.
  • polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, and JP-A-2020-066678 are described.
  • Block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001, etc.), BYK series, and Sol manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. Examples include the sparse series (for example, Solsparse 20000, 76500, etc.), the Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. Ajispar series, and the like. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the resin content is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 40% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of resin, or may contain two or more kinds of resins. When two or more kinds of resins are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer or an oligomer, but a monomer is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3 mmol / g or more, further preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol / g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 12 mmol / g or less, further preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol / g or less.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably a compound containing 4 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. According to this aspect, the curability of the coloring composition by exposure is good.
  • the upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and further preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of stability over time of the coloring composition.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, and a 3 to 10 functional (meth) acrylate compound. It is more preferably present, and it is particularly preferable that it is a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 6 functions.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group. Since such a polymerizable compound has high flexibility and the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group easily moves, the polymerizable compounds easily react with each other at the time of exposure, and a cured film having excellent adhesion to a support or the like (a cured film). Pixels) can be formed. Further, when the hydroxyalkylphenone compound is used as the photopolymerization initiator, the polymerizable compound and the photopolymerization initiator are in close proximity to each other to generate radicals in the vicinity of the polymerizable compound to make the polymerizable compound more effective. It is presumed that the reaction can be carried out, and it is easy to form a cured film (pixel) in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound is preferably 3 or more, and more preferably 4 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20 or less from the viewpoint of the stability over time of the coloring composition.
  • the SP value (Solubility Parameter) of the compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group is preferably 9.0 to 11.0 from the viewpoint of compatibility with other components in the coloring composition. ..
  • the upper limit is more preferably 10.75 or less, further preferably 10.5 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 9.25 or more, and further preferably 9.5 or more.
  • the SP value used is a calculated value based on the Fedors method.
  • Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group include a compound represented by the following formula (M-1). Equation (M-1) In the formula, A 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R 1 represents an alkylene group, m represents an integer of 1 to 30, and n. Represents an integer of 3 or more, and L 2 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group represented by A 1 include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and a group in which two or more of these are combined. ..
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the carbon number of the alkylene group represented by R 1 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, further preferably 1 to 3, particularly preferably 2 or 3, and most preferably 2.
  • the alkylene group represented by R 1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. Specific examples of the alkylene group represented by R 1 include an ethylene group, a linear or branched propylene group, and an ethylene group is preferable.
  • M represents an integer of 1 to 30, preferably an integer of 1 to 20, more preferably an integer of 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5.
  • N represents an integer of 3 or more, and an integer of 4 or more is preferable.
  • the upper limit of n is preferably an integer of 15 or less, more preferably an integer of 10 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 6 or less.
  • the n-valent linking group represented by L 2 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group and a group consisting of a combination thereof, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group and a complex. Examples thereof include a group consisting of a combination of at least one selected from ring groups and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- and -NH-.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and linear or branched is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a non-aromatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. It is also preferable that the n-valent linking group represented by L 2 is a group derived from a polyfunctional alcohol.
  • Equation (M-2) a compound represented by the following formula (M-2) is more preferable.
  • R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 1 represents an alkylene group
  • m represents an integer of 1 to 30
  • n represents an integer of 3 or more
  • L 2 represents an n-valent linking group.
  • R 1 , L 2 , m, n in the formula (M-2) are synonymous with R 1 , L 2 , m, n in the formula (M-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • Examples of commercially available compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group include KAYARAD T-1420 (T) and RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • dipentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320) , Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available) KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK ester A-DPH-12E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and / or propylene glycol residues.
  • SR454, SR499 commercially available from Sartmer
  • diglycerin EO ethylene oxide modified (meth) acrylate
  • pentaerythritol tetraacrylate manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., NK ester A
  • 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA
  • RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Aronix M-402 manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • Aronix TO-2349 manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane propylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, and pentaerythritol. It is also preferable to use a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound such as tri (meth) acrylate.
  • Commercially available trifunctional (meth) acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, and M-305.
  • M-303, M-452, M-450 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a polymerizable compound having an acid group can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having an acid group By using a polymerizable compound having an acid group, the colored composition in the unexposed portion can be easily removed during development, and the generation of development residue can be suppressed.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the preferable acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the solubility in a developing solution is good, and when the acid value is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
  • a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used.
  • examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., a (meth) acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the polymerizable compound it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene.
  • an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene.
  • commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-0322293, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-016765.
  • Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable.
  • a polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A No. 01-105238.
  • the polymerizable compounds are UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, and LINK-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 5 to 35% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 15% by mass or more.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds. When two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, a compound having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiator examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, and thio compounds. , Ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, hydroxyalkylphenone compounds, aminoalkylphenone compounds, phenylglycilate compounds and the like.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably at least one selected from an oxime compound, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and more preferably an oxime compound. ..
  • the photopolymerization initiator the compound described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173 and JP-A-6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019 Peroxide-based Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/221177, Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No.
  • phenylglycilate compound examples include phenylglycoxylic acid methyl ester.
  • examples of commercially available products include Omnirad MBF (manufactured by IGM Resins BV) and Irgacure MBF (manufactured by BASF).
  • acylphosphine compound examples include the acylphosphine compound described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898. Specific examples include bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide and the like.
  • examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (above, manufactured by IGM Resins BV), Irgacure 819, and Irgacure TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
  • aminoalkylphenone compound examples include the aminoalkylphenone compound described in JP-A No. 10-291969.
  • Commercially available products of the aminoalkylphenone compound include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379, Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgarure 907, Irger9r , Irgacure 379EG (above, manufactured by BASF) and the like.
  • hydroxyalkylphenone compound examples include compounds represented by the following formula (V). Equation (V) In the formula, Rv 1 represents a substituent, Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. m represents an integer from 0 to 5.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by Rv 1 include an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group are preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group and alkoxy group represented by Rv 1 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and a group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure.
  • Examples of the group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure include a benzene ring to which Rv 1 is bonded in the formula (V) or a group having a structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from Rv 1 .
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, respectively.
  • an alkyl group preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • hydroxyalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (above, IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 1173, Irgar Made) and so on.
  • Examples of the oxime compound include the compound described in JP-A-2001-233842, the compound described in JP-A-2000-080068, the compound described in JP-A-2006-342166, and J. Am. C. S. The compound according to Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), J. Mol. C. S. The compound described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), the compound described in Journal of Photopolisr Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385, the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385. Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-109766, compounds described in Japanese Patent No.
  • oxime compound examples include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminovtan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, and the like.
  • 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Examples thereof include imino-1-phenylpropane-1-one.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compound described in JP-A-2014-137466, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and the compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. Will be.
  • an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of such an oxime compound include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/083505.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom is preferably a compound represented by the formula (OX-1).
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and R 1 is an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom.
  • R 2 and R 3 independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group, respectively.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the formula (OX-1) may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and particularly preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring.
  • Ar 1 is preferably a benzene ring.
  • Ar 2 is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and more preferably a naphthalene ring.
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, -OR X1 , -SR X1 , -COR X1 , and -COOR X1 . , -OCOR X1 , -NR X1 R X2 , -NHCOR X1 , -CONR X1 R X2 , -NHCONR X1 R X2 , -NHCOOR X1 , -SO 2 R X1 , -SO 2 OR X1 , -NHSO 2 R X1 etc.
  • RX1 and RX2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group as a substituent and the alkyl group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably 1 to 30.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the alkyl group may be partially or wholly substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom).
  • the alkyl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents.
  • the aryl group as a substituent and the aryl group represented by RX1 and RX2 preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. Further, the aryl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents.
  • the heterocyclic group as a substituent and the heterocyclic group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. Further, in the heterocyclic group, a part or all of a hydrogen atom may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 is preferably an unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 2 preferably has a substituent.
  • -COR X1 is preferable.
  • RX1 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, more preferably an aryl group.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 of the formula (OX-1) represents an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the group containing a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing alkyl group) and a group containing an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing group).
  • the fluorine-containing groups include -OR F1 , -SR F1 , -COR F1 , -COOR F1 , -OCOR F1 , -NR F1 R F2 , -NHCOR F1 , -CONR F1 R F2 , -NHCONR F1 R F2 , and -NHCOOR. At least one group selected from F1 , -SO 2 R F1 , -SO 2 OR F1 and -NHSO 2 R F1 is preferred.
  • RF1 represents a fluorine-containing alkyl group
  • RF2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine-containing alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the fluorine-containing group is preferably -OR F1 .
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group represented by RF1 and RF2 and the alkyl group represented by RF2 preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. ..
  • the fluorine-containing alkyl group and the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferable.
  • the substitution rate of the fluorine atom is preferably 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%, still more preferably 60 to 100%.
  • the substitution rate of fluorine atoms means the ratio (%) of the number of substitutions to fluorine atoms to the number of total hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group.
  • the aryl group represented by RF2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by RF2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring.
  • the number of condensations is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 3 to 5, and particularly preferably 3 to 4.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 40, more preferably 3 to 30, and even more preferably 3 to 20.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and more preferably a nitrogen atom.
  • the group containing a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure represented by the formula (1) or (2).
  • * In the formula represents a connecting hand. * -CHF 2 (1) * -CF 3 (2)
  • R 2 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, further preferably 1 to 10, and particularly preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above as the substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 3 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, and even more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred.
  • the aryl group represented by R 3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • oxime compound having a fluorine atom examples include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36-40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471.
  • Compound (C-3) and the like can be mentioned.
  • an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A and paragraphs 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466. Examples thereof include the compound described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, ADEKA ARCULDS NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. 2015/036910.
  • an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used.
  • Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more in methanol and the extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol are 1. It is also preferable to use in combination with the photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / g cm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more.
  • the coloring composition is easily cured sufficiently by exposure, and the flatness is good in a low temperature process (for example, a process at a temperature of 150 ° C.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2 it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above-mentioned extinction coefficient from the above-mentioned compounds.
  • the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator at the above wavelength is a value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrum meter (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies. The absorbance coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated. In the above formula, ⁇ represents the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A represents the absorbance, c represents the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and l represents the optical path length (cm).
  • the extinction coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.1 ⁇ . It is more preferably 10 4 mL / g cm or more, further preferably 1.2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm, and 1.3 ⁇ 10 4 to 5.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL. It is even more preferably / gcm, and particularly preferably 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm.
  • the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm, preferably 1.5 ⁇ 10 4 to. It is more preferably 9.5 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 3.0 ⁇ 10 4 to 8.0 ⁇ 10 4 mL / gcm.
  • an oxime compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, and compatibility with other components contained in the composition.
  • the oxime compound contains a fluorine atom.
  • the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (OX-1) is preferable.
  • photopolymerization initiator A1 examples include 1,2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (commercially available products include, for example, Irgure OXE01, BASF). , Etanon, 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 1- (O-acetyloxime) (commercially available products include, for example, Irgacure OXE02, BASF), (C-13), (C-14), (C-17) and the like shown in the above-mentioned specific examples of the oxime compound can be mentioned.
  • the extinction coefficient of the light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm or less, preferably 10 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / gcm, 20 More preferably, it is ⁇ 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / g cm.
  • the difference between the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 9.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL.
  • the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / gcm or more, and 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 6 mL / gcm. It is preferably 5.0 ⁇ 10 3 to 1.0 ⁇ 10 5 mL / g cm.
  • a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, a phenylglioxylate compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound and a phenylglycilate compound are more preferable, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is further preferable.
  • the hydroxyalkylphenone compound the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is preferable.
  • photopolymerization initiator A2 examples include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone and 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propane-1-. On etc. can be mentioned.
  • examples of commercially available products of the photopolymerization initiator A2 include Omnirad 2959 (hydroxyalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins BV).
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 As a combination of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, a combination in which the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is preferable, and the photopolymerization initiator A1 is A combination of an oxime compound in which the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is more preferable, the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom, and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is A combination of the compounds represented by the above formula (V) is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the content M of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition and the content I of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition on a mass% basis.
  • the ratio (M / I) with and to is preferably 20 or less.
  • the upper limit of the above ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less.
  • the lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
  • the content of the oxime compound is preferably 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the oxime compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the content M of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition and the content IO of the oxime compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition on a mass% basis.
  • the ratio (M / IO ) of is preferably 20 or less.
  • the upper limit of the ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less.
  • the lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is preferable.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the ratio with and (M / I A1 ) is preferably 20 or less.
  • the upper limit of the ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less.
  • the lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 0.1 to 10.0 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, further preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 9.0% by mass or less, further preferably 8.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 7.0% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention comprises 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A1.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 60 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 70 parts by mass or more.
  • a cured film having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be formed in a low temperature process (for example, a process at a temperature of 150 ° C.
  • the total amount of each of them satisfies the above requirements.
  • the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition are used.
  • the total content with the agent A2 is preferably 3.1 to 25% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 4% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, still more preferably 8% by mass or more. It is even more preferably 9% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2 (hereinafter, also referred to as other photopolymerization initiators) as the photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable that the other photopolymerization initiator is substantially not contained. When the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is substantially not contained, the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2. It means that it is the following, more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 0.1 part by mass or less, and further preferably not containing another photopolymerization initiator.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable.
  • the epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group.
  • the alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
  • the cyclic ether group is represented by a group represented by the formula (e-1), a group represented by the formula (e-2), a group represented by the formula (e-3) and a group represented by the formula (e-4). It is preferably at least one selected from the groups, and more preferably the group represented by the formula (e-1).
  • n in the formula (e-1) is 0, the group represented by the formula (e-1) is an epoxy group, and when n is 1, it is represented by the formula (e-1).
  • the group is an oxetanyl group.
  • the group represented by the formula (e-2), the group represented by the formula (e-3) and the group represented by the formula (e-4) are alicyclic epoxy groups.
  • RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
  • ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond;
  • * represents a bond.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, further preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • RE1 is a hydrogen atom.
  • n is 1, it is preferable that RE1 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).
  • the monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by the ring AE1 of the formula (e-2) is preferably a 5- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered aliphatic ring. It is more preferably a hydrocarbon ring, and even more preferably a 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Specific examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring, and more preferably a cyclohexane ring. Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (e-2) include the groups shown below.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group it is also preferable to use a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group in combination. According to this aspect, a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the occurrence of color mixing can be suppressed more effectively.
  • the mass ratio of the compound having an epoxy group to the compound having an oxetanyl group is 100 parts by mass of the compound having an epoxy group.
  • the amount of the compound containing the above is preferably 10 to 300 parts by mass, more preferably 20 to 200 parts by mass, still more preferably 50 to 150 parts by mass.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group may be a monomer or a polymer compound.
  • its molecular weight is preferably less than 1500, more preferably 100 to 1250, and even more preferably 300 to 1000.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group is a polymer compound, its weight average molecular weight is preferably 1500 or more, more preferably 1750 or more, still more preferably 2000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and even more preferably 10,000 or less.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group it is preferable to use a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more. According to this aspect, a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the occurrence of color mixing can be suppressed more effectively. Further, as the compound having a cyclic ether group, it is also preferable to use a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more and a compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 in combination.
  • the mass ratio of the compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more to the compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 is 5 to 200 parts by mass for the compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more. It is preferably 10 to 100 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 75 parts by mass.
  • the content of the cyclic ether group of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, more preferably 2.5 to 6.3 mmol / g, and 3.0 to 6.3 to 6.3 mmol / g. It is more preferably 6.0 mmol / g.
  • the content of the cyclic ether group is preferably 2.0 to 7.0 mmol / g, preferably 3.0 to 6.5 mmol / g. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 3.5 to 6.0 mmol / g.
  • the content of the cyclic ether group is preferably 2.5 to 6.5 mmol / g, preferably 3.0 to 6.3 mmol / g. Is more preferable, and 3.5 to 6.0 mmol / g is further preferable.
  • the content of the cyclic ether group of the compound having a cyclic ether group is a value calculated by dividing the number of cyclic ether groups contained in the compound having a cyclic ether group by the molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group. ..
  • the coloring composition of the present invention it is preferable to use a compound containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group as the compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group include a repeating unit represented by the formula (A1).
  • X a1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z a1 represents a cyclic ether group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by Xa1 of the formula (A1) includes a poly (meth) acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, a polyester-based linking group, a polyurethane-based linking group, a polyurea-based linking group, and a polyamide-based linking group.
  • Examples include linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polystyrene-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups, novolak-based linking groups, poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, and bisphenol-based linking groups.
  • the linking group and the novolak-based linking group are preferable, the polyether-based linking group, the novolak-based linking group and the poly (meth) acrylic-based linking group are more preferable, and the polyether-based linking group and the poly (meth) acrylic-based linking group are further preferable.
  • Polyester-based linking groups are particularly preferred.
  • the divalent linking group represented by La1 of the formula ( A1 ) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and -NH-. , -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups consisting of a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 of the formula (A1) include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable. Further, the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) or a group represented by the formula (e-2), and is represented by the formula (e-1). It is more preferable that it is a group to be used.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure, a repeating unit having a novolak structure, or a repeating unit having a (meth) acrylic structure, and a repeating unit having a polyether structure or a (meth) structure. It is more preferably a repeating unit having an acrylic structure, and even more preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group preferably contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring in the main chain structure.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring contained in the main chain structure is preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • the hydrophobicity of the main chain makes it easy for a compound having a cyclic ether group to be present in the vicinity of the pigment, and it is easy to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring contained in the main chain structure may be a monocyclic ring, a condensed ring or a crosslinked ring, but is preferably a monocyclic ring.
  • aliphatic hydrocarbon ring examples include a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cycloheptane ring, and the like, and a cyclohexane ring is preferable.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure containing the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include the repeating unit represented by the formula (A2).
  • X a2 represents a trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group
  • La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z a 2 represents a cyclic ether group.
  • Examples of the trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group represented by Xa2 include a cyclohexane ring group, a cyclopentane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, and a cyclohexane ring group is preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by La2 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, and -SO-. Examples thereof include -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and a group consisting of a combination of two or more of these.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • La2 is preferably a single bond.
  • Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a2 include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable. Further, the cyclic ether group represented by Z a2 is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) or a group represented by the formula (e-2), and is represented by the formula (e-1). It is more preferable that it is a group to be used.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group may have another repeating unit in addition to the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group.
  • Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit B-1) and a repeating unit having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit B-2). , Repeating unit having a polymerizable group (hereinafter, repeating unit B-3) and the like.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group has the repeating unit B-1, a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature can be formed, and a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed is formed. be able to. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed. Further, when the compound having a cyclic ether group contains the repeating unit B-2, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved.
  • Examples of the acid group contained in the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include a group that decomposes and is eliminated by the action of an acid or a base.
  • the protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. Is more preferable.
  • RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
  • RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl.
  • Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
  • RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY1 to RY3 in the formula ( Y1 ) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In the formula ( Y1 ), two of RY1 to RY3 may be combined to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by combining the two of RY1 to RY3 includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY4 to RY6 in the formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. It is preferable that at least two of RY4 to RY6 of the formula (Y2) are methyl groups. In the formula (Y2), two of RY4 to RY6 may be combined to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described by the formula (Y1).
  • RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. It represents a group or an aryl group, and RY7 or RY8 may be bonded to RY9 to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the ring formed by binding RY7 or RY8 and RY9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group and a tetrahydropyranyl group.
  • RY7 or RY8 and RY9 are combined to form a ring.
  • one of RY7 and RY8 is a hydrogen atom.
  • Ar Y1 represents an aryl group
  • RY10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • Ar Y1 and RY10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • RY10 is preferably an alkyl group.
  • RY11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, and even more preferably 40 to 120.
  • a coloring composition having excellent storage stability and excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
  • protective group examples include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group and 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group of the repeating unit B-3 include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • repeating unit B-1 examples include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Further, as the repeating unit B-2, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2) can be mentioned. Further, as the repeating unit B-3, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B3) can be mentioned.
  • X b1 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b1 represents an acid group.
  • X b2 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b2 represents a single-bonded or divalent linking group
  • Z b2 represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group (B3).
  • X b3 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L b3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • Z b3 represents a polymerizable group.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by X b1 of the formula (B1), the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 of the formula (B2), and the trivalent linking group represented by X b3 of the formula (B3) are not particularly limited. do not have.
  • Examples thereof include a system-based linking group and a novolak-based linking group, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups and novolac-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic is preferable.
  • System linking groups are more preferred.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L b1 of the formula (B1), the divalent linking group represented by L b2 of the formula (B2), and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 of the formula (B3) include an alkylene group (as a divalent linking group).
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
  • Examples of the acid group represented by Z b1 of the formula (B1) include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and the acid group is a carboxy group. Is more preferable.
  • Examples of the group in which the acid group represented by Z b2 of the formula (B2) is protected by a protecting group include a group in which the acid group is protected by a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5). It is preferable that the acid group is a group protected by a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5).
  • Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group represented by Z b3 of the formula (B3) include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the content of the unit B-1 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 60 mol% or less, further preferably 40 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 8 mol% or more, further preferably 10 mol% or more.
  • the content of the unit B-2 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 45 mol% or less, further preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 mol% or more, further preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit B-1 and a repeating unit B-2, respectively, the compound having a cyclic ether group has a repeating unit B-2 for 1 mol of the repeating unit B-1. It preferably contains 0.4 to 3.2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 mol, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 mol. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film can be made parallel at a higher level.
  • the content of the unit B-3 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 45 mol% or less, further preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2 mol% or more, further preferably 3 mol% or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound having a cyclic ether group include compounds having the following structures.
  • Examples of commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include naphthalene-modified epoxy resins such as EPICLON HP5000 and EPICLON HP4032D (all manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • Examples of the alkyldiphenol type epoxy resin include EPICLON 820 (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (all manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EP (Made by Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • Bisphenol F type epoxy resins include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation). As mentioned above, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like can be mentioned.
  • Phenolic novolak type epoxy resins include jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc. Can be mentioned.
  • cresol novolak type epoxy resin EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • EOCN-1020 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), celoxide 2021P, celoxide 2081, celoxside 2083, celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, EPO Examples include PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation) and the like.
  • Examples of the compound having a cyclic ether group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP2013-011869, and the compounds described in paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP2014-043556.
  • the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 2% by mass or more, and further preferably 3% by mass or more. preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group is C.I. I. It is preferably 1 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 150 parts by mass or less, further preferably 100 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2.5 parts by mass or more, further preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 10 parts by mass or more from the viewpoint of suppressing color mixing of the obtained cured film.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of compound having a cyclic ether group, or may contain two or more kinds of compounds. When two or more compounds having a cyclic ether group are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably in the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a compound containing a frill group (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing compound).
  • a frill group-containing compound a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group
  • the frill group contained in the frill group-containing compound and the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group contained in the above-mentioned polymerizable compound are selected from Diels-. Since the Alder reaction forms a bond even at a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, it is excellent in low temperature curing.
  • the structure of the frill group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it contains a frill group (a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan).
  • a frill group a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan.
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0089 of JP-A-2017-194662 can be used.
  • Examples of the frill group-containing compound include JP-A-2000-233581, JP-A-1994-271558, JP-A-1994-293830, JP-A-1996-239421, JP-A-1998-508655, and special publications.
  • the frill group-containing compound may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • a polymer is preferable because it is easy to improve the durability of the obtained film.
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 2000 to 70000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 60,000 or less, further preferably 50,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, further preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
  • the molecular weight is preferably less than 2000, more preferably 1800 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 175 or more.
  • the polymer-type frill group-containing compound is also a component corresponding to the resin in the coloring composition of the present invention. Further, the frill group-containing compound having a polymerizable group is also a component corresponding to the polymerizable compound in the coloring composition of the present invention.
  • Examples of the monomer-type frill group-containing compound include a compound represented by the following formula (fur-1).
  • Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Rf 2 represents a divalent linking group.
  • an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and two or more of these are combined.
  • the group is mentioned.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and the like.
  • the frill group-containing monomer is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (fur-1-1).
  • Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Rf 11 represents -O- or -NH-
  • Rf 12 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by Rf 12 an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and two or more of these are combined.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and the like.
  • frill group-containing monomer examples include compounds having the following structures.
  • Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the polymer-type frill group-containing compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing polymer) is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit containing a frill group, and is derived from a compound represented by the above formula (fur-1). It is more preferable that the resin contains a unit.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing a frill group to all the repeating units is preferably 30 to 70% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 35% by mass or more, further preferably 40% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 65% by mass or less, further preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the concentration of the frill group in the frill group-containing polymer is preferably 0.5 to 6.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 4.0 mmol per 1 g of the frill group-containing polymer.
  • concentration of the frill group is 0.5 mmol or more, preferably 1.0 mmol or more, it is easy to form an excellent cured film due to solvent resistance and the like.
  • concentration of the frill group is 6.0 mmol or less, preferably 4.0 mmol or less, the stability over time of the coloring composition is good.
  • the frill group-containing polymer may contain a repeating unit having an acid group and / or a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, in addition to the repeating unit having a frill group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the acid value of the frill group-containing polymer is preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 40 to 130 mgKOH / g.
  • the proportion of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 2 to 25% by mass in all the repeating units of the frill group-containing polymer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 4% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 20 to 60% by mass in all the repeating units of the frill group-containing polymer.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 25% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, further preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the frill group-containing polymer can be produced by the method described in paragraphs 0052 to 0101 of JP-A-2017-194662.
  • the content of the frill group-containing compound is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 2.5% by mass or more, further preferably 5.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 7.5% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 65% by mass or less, further preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the content of the frill group-containing polymer in the resin contained in the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 100% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 15% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • the content of the frill group-containing polymer is the same as that of the resin b1. It is preferably 10 to 200 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or more.
  • the resin b1 and the frill group-containing polymer in combination, it is easy to form a cured film having excellent curability at a low temperature and excellent spectral characteristics. Further, when the ratio of both is in the above range, the effect that the durability of the obtained film can be further improved can be expected.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the coloring composition.
  • the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents and the like. For these details, paragraph 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvent examples include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbi Tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N, N-di
  • aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may need to be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 parts by mass (parts) with respect to the total amount of organic solvent. Per millision) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
  • a solvent having a low metal content it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per parts) or less. If necessary, a solvent at the mass ppt (parts per tension) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Synthetic Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
  • Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms but different structures). Further, only one kind of isomer may be contained, or a plurality of kinds may be contained.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 60 to 95% by mass.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 90% by mass or less, further preferably 87.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 85% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 65% by mass or more, further preferably 70% by mass or more, and further preferably 75% by mass or more.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain an environmentally regulated substance from the viewpoint of environmental regulations.
  • substantially free of the environmentally regulated substance means that the content of the environmentally regulated substance in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, and preferably 30 mass ppm or less. It is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • the environmentally regulated substance include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • REACH Registration Evolution Analysis and Restriction of Chemicals
  • PRTR Policy Release and Transfer Register
  • VOC Volatile and Transfer Registor
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
  • a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substance there is a method of heating or depressurizing the inside of the system to raise the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substance or higher and distilling off the environmentally regulated substance from the system to reduce the amount. Further, when distilling off a small amount of an environmentally regulated substance, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to improve efficiency.
  • a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled under reduced pressure in order to prevent the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding and cross-linking between molecules during distillation under reduced pressure. May be.
  • distillation methods are either a raw material step, a product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution after polymerization or a polyfunctional monomer solution), or a colored composition step prepared by mixing these compounds. It is also possible at the stage of.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative.
  • the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is replaced with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimide methyl group.
  • the chromogens constituting the pigment derivative include quinoline skeleton, benzoimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, phthalocyanine skeleton, anthracinone skeleton, quinacridone skeleton, dioxazine skeleton, perinone skeleton, perylene skeleton, thioindigo skeleton, and iso.
  • Examples thereof include indolin skeleton, isoindolinone skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, slene skeleton, metal complex skeleton, etc. , Azo skeleton and benzoimidazolone skeleton are more preferred.
  • As the acid group of the pigment derivative a sulfo group and a carboxy group are preferable, and a sulfo group is more preferable.
  • As the basic group of the pigment derivative an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable.
  • Specific examples of the pigment derivative include Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 56-118462, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-264674, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the lower limit of this range is more preferably 0.25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 0.75 parts by mass or more, and 1 part by mass or more. It is more preferable to have.
  • the upper limit of this range is more preferably 25 parts by mass or less, further preferably 20 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is within the above range, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved.
  • the pigment derivative only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may also contain polyalkyleneimine.
  • Polyalkyleneimine is used, for example, as a dispersion aid.
  • the dispersion aid is a material for enhancing the dispersibility of the pigment in the coloring composition.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of an alkyleneimine and has a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group, respectively.
  • the carbon number of the alkyleneimine is preferably 2 to 6, more preferably 2 to 4, further preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
  • the molecular weight of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, further preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2000 or less.
  • the molecular weight of polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula.
  • the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used. If the measurement cannot be performed by the boiling point elevation method or is difficult to measure, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used.
  • the value of the number average molecular weight in the polystyrene conversion value measured by the GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method is used.
  • the amine value of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol / g or more, more preferably 10 mmol / g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol / g or more.
  • alkyleneimine examples include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine, and the like, preferably ethyleneimine or propyleneimine, and more preferably ethyleneimine. preferable.
  • the polyalkyleneimine is particularly preferably polyethyleneimine.
  • polyethyleneimine preferably contains a primary amino group in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, based on the total of the primary amino group, the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group. , 30 mol% or more is more preferable.
  • Examples of commercially available polyethyleneimine products include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, further preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 4.5% by mass or less, further preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less.
  • the content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, further preferably 1 part by mass or more, and further preferably 2 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 8 parts by mass or less.
  • As the polyalkyleneimine only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is in the above range.
  • a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of accelerating the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature.
  • the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol compound, and more preferably a compound represented by the formula (T1). Equation (T1) (In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a linking group of 2 to 4 valences.)
  • the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the curing accelerator is a methylol-based compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2015-034963), amines, phosphonium salt, amidin salt, amide compound (for example, above, for example.
  • an alkoxysilane compound for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2011-253504
  • an onium salt compound eg, JP-A-2015-034963
  • a compound exemplified as an acid generator in paragraph No. 0216, a compound described in JP-A-2009-180949) and the like can also be used.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. More preferably by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • a silane coupling agent a silane compound having at least two kinds of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent includes at least one group selected from a vinyl group, an epoxy group, a styrene group, a methacrylic group, an amino group, an isocyanurate group, a ureido group, a mercapto group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and an alkoxy group.
  • silane coupling agent examples include N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-2- (aminoethyl) -3.
  • the description in paragraphs 0155 to 0158 of JP2013-254047A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is more preferable, and 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more kinds of silane coupling agents. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and the like. Examples thereof include 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, first cerium salt, etc.).
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types of polymerization inhibitors. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • an ultraviolet absorber a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound and the like can be used.
  • paragraph numbers 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A paragraph numbers 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-066814, and paragraph numbers 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946. It can be taken into consideration and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of commercially available products of ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Kagaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the benzotriazole compound include the MYUA series made of Miyoshi Oil & Fat (The Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016).
  • the ultraviolet absorber the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains an ultraviolet absorber
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferable, and 0.1 to 3% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the ultraviolet absorber only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably in the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the surfactant described in paragraph Nos. 0238 to 0245 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 is mentioned, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • the liquid characteristics particularly, fluidity
  • the liquid saving property can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
  • silicone-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a silicone-based surfactant as the surfactant from the viewpoint of environmental friendliness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity in the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and has good solubility in a coloring composition.
  • fluorine-based surfactant examples include the surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-041318 (paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of International Publication No. 2014/017669) and the like, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-.
  • the surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 132503 and the surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634 are mentioned, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafax F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which a portion of the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
  • fluorine-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant include the fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant a block polymer can also be used.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compounds is preferably 3000 to 50,000, for example 14000.
  • % indicating the ratio of the repeating unit is mol%.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295 of JP2010-164965, Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, manufactured by DIC Corporation. RS-72-K and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, the compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
  • a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by the formula (fi-1) is also preferable to use as a surfactant.
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • represents 1 or 2
  • X ⁇ + represents an ⁇ -valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, and a first.
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ethers, polyoxyethylene stearyl ethers, etc.
  • silicone-based surfactant examples include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, and FZ-2122.
  • TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials
  • KP-341, KF-6001, KF- Examples thereof include 6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (above, manufactured by Big Chemie) and the like.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass.
  • the surfactant may be only one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, antiaggregating agents and the like can be added to the coloring composition of the present invention, if necessary.
  • additives include the additives described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the antioxidant for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus-based compound (for example, the compound described in paragraph No. 0042 of JP-A-2011-090147), a thioether compound and the like can be used.
  • the ADEKA stub series (AO-20, AO-30, AO-40, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-80, AO-" manufactured by ADEKA Corporation. 330 etc.).
  • the antioxidant the polyfunctional hindered amine antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, the antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/1604024, paragraph Nos. 0023 to Patent No. 6268967.
  • the antioxidant described in 0048 can also be used. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site that functions as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250 ° C. or at 80 to 200 ° C. in the presence of an acid / base catalyst.
  • Specific examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219.
  • Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention includes a sensitizer and a photostabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A-2004-295116, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 1981 of JP-A-2004-091940, and JP-A-2018-091940.
  • the storage stabilizer described in paragraph No. 0242 of the publication can be contained.
  • the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be restricted.
  • the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid particularly, the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • a salt thereof and a per.
  • the content of the fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly the perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and salts thereof, as well as perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and salts thereof.
  • a coloring composition that is substantially free of salts thereof may be selected.
  • examples of compounds that can substitute for the regulated compound include compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and a salt thereof, and a perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and a salt thereof within the maximum allowable range.
  • the container for containing the coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used.
  • a storage container for the purpose of suppressing impurities from being mixed into raw materials and coloring compositions, a multi-layer bottle having a container inner wall made of 6 types and 6 layers of resin and a bottle having 6 types of resin having a 7-layer structure. It is also preferable to use. Examples of such a container include the container described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-123351.
  • the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, improving the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the deterioration of the components.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be produced by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to produce the coloring composition, or each component may be appropriately used as two or more solutions or dispersions, if necessary. Then, these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to produce a colored composition.
  • a process of dispersing particles such as pigments may be included.
  • the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion and the like.
  • the process and disperser for dispersing pigments are "Dispersion Technology Complete Works, Published by Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial”. Practical application The process and disperser described in Paragraph No.
  • JP-A-2015-157893 "Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be preferably used.
  • the particles may be miniaturized in the salt milling step.
  • the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be referred to.
  • any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation.
  • fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), and polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP).
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
  • nylon eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6)
  • polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP).
  • filters using materials such as (including high-density, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene resin).
  • polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
  • the pore diameter of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably.
  • the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to.
  • various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. DFA4201NIEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.
  • Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd. Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nippon Microlith Co., Ltd.), KITZ Microfilter Co., Ltd., etc.
  • KITZ Microfilter Co., Ltd. etc.
  • a fiber-like filter medium As the filter.
  • the fiber-like filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like.
  • examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno Co., Ltd.
  • filters different filters (eg, first filter and second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once or twice or more. Further, filters having different pore diameters may be combined within the above-mentioned range. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing the other components, the filtration may be performed with the second filter.
  • the cured film of the present invention is a film obtained by curing the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the cured film of the present invention can be used for a color filter or the like. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a colored layer (pixel) of a color filter, and more preferably used as a green pixel.
  • the film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more, further preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 1.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 1.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 65% or more, more preferably 70% or more, still more preferably 75% or more. ..
  • the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 65% or more, still more preferably 70% or more.
  • the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 2% or less.
  • the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 1% or less.
  • the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less is preferably 60% or less, more preferably 50% or less, still more preferably 40% or less.
  • the color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention.
  • the cured film of the present invention is preferably provided as a colored pixel of a color filter, more preferably as a green pixel.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used for a solid-state image sensor or a display device.
  • the color filter of the present invention has colored pixels of other hues in addition to the pixels of the cured film of the present invention.
  • the colored pixels of other hues include blue pixels, red pixels, yellow pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and the like.
  • a preferred embodiment of the color filter of the present invention includes an embodiment having a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel composed of the cured film of the present invention.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel.
  • the partition wall may be formed by the configuration described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0040656.
  • the red pixel preferably used in combination with the pixel of the cured film of the present invention preferably contains a red colorant.
  • the content of the red colorant in the colorant contained in the red pixel is preferably 30% by mass or more, and more preferably 40% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content of the red colorant in the colorant contained in the red pixel may be 100% by mass, 99% by mass or less, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass. It may be less than or equal to%.
  • the red pixel preferably contains 40% by mass or more of the red colorant, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and further preferably 60% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content of the red colorant is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • the red colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48: 2,48:3,48:4 49,49: 1,49: 2,52: 1,52: 2,53: 1,57: 1,60: 1,63: 1,66,67,81: 1,81: 2,81: 3, 83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291 Red pigments such as 294, 295, 296, 297,
  • the red pixel preferably contains a yellow colorant in addition to the red colorant.
  • the content of the yellow colorant is preferably 3 to 60 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, and preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant. More preferred.
  • Examples of the yellow colorant include C.I. I.
  • the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 550 nm is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less, and further preferably 1% or less. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 550 nm is preferably 3% or less, more preferably 1% or less, still more preferably 0.5% or less. Further, the minimum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 600 to 700 nm is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 25% or more, still more preferably 40% or more. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 600 to 700 nm is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90% or more, still more preferably 95% or more.
  • the blue pixels preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention preferably contain a blue colorant.
  • the content of the blue colorant in the colorant contained in the blue pixel is preferably 40% by mass or more, and more preferably 60% by mass or more.
  • the blue pixel preferably contains 20% by mass or more of the blue colorant, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and further preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content of the blue colorant is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 60% by mass or less.
  • Examples of the blue colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15: 1,15: 2,15: 3,15: 4,15: 6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88 etc.
  • Pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferred.
  • the blue pixel contains at least one selected from a purple colorant and a red colorant in addition to the blue colorant.
  • the content of the purple colorant is preferably 10 to 90 parts by mass, more preferably 20 to 75 parts by mass, and more preferably 30 to 60 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the blue colorant. More preferred.
  • Examples of the purple colorant and the red colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61 and other purple pigments, xanthene compounds and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the xanthene compound include salt-forming compounds obtained by reacting a resin having a cationic group in the side chain described in paragraphs 0025 to 0077 of JP-A-2016-180834 with a xanthene-based acid dye. ..
  • the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 70% or more.
  • the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 40% or more, more preferably 50% or more, still more preferably 60% or more.
  • the minimum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, still more preferably 10% or less.
  • the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is preferably 25% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 5% or less.
  • the structure of the present invention has green pixels, red pixels, and blue pixels obtained by using the coloring composition of the present invention described above.
  • the green pixel preferably has the spectral characteristics described in the section of the cured film of the present invention described above. Further, it is preferable that the red pixel and the blue pixel have the spectral characteristics described in the above-mentioned color filter section.
  • ⁇ Pixel formation method> A method of forming pixels will be described.
  • green pixels By using the coloring composition of the present invention, for example, green pixels can be formed.
  • the pixel forming method includes a step of applying a coloring composition on a support to form a coloring composition layer, a step of exposing the coloring composition layer in a pattern, and developing a coloring composition layer after exposure. It is preferable to include the steps to be performed. It is preferable to form the pixels at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process. In the present invention, “performing at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process" means that all the steps of forming pixels using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. When a step of further heating after developing the colored composition layer after exposure is provided, it means that this heating step is also performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower.
  • each step will be described in detail.
  • the coloring composition is applied on the support to form the coloring composition layer.
  • the support include a glass substrate, a polycarbonate substrate, a polyester substrate, an aromatic polyamide substrate, a polyamide-imide substrate, a polyimide substrate and the like.
  • An organic light emitting layer may be formed on these substrates.
  • an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate for improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the surface.
  • the undercoat layer can also be formed, for example, by using the composition obtained by removing the colorant from the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the surface contact angle of the undercoat layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane.
  • the resin composition has good coatability.
  • the surface contact angle of the undercoat layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition.
  • a drop method drop cast
  • a slit coat method a spray method
  • a roll coat method a rotary coating method
  • spin coating a cast coating method
  • a slit and spin method a pre-wet method (for example, JP-A-2009-145395).
  • Methods described in the publication Inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc.
  • Various printing methods; transfer method using a mold or the like; nano-imprint method and the like can be mentioned.
  • the method of application in inkjet is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the method shown in "Expandable / usable inkjet-infinite possibilities seen in patents-, published in February 2005, Sumi Betechno Research" (especially from page 115). Page 133), JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned. Further, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the description of International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked).
  • the prebake temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, further preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 50 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher.
  • the prebake time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed on a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step).
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing the colored composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. As a result, the exposed portion can be cured.
  • Examples of radiation (light) that can be used for exposure include g-line and i-line. Further, light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of the light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), ArF line (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) is preferable. Further, a long wave light source having a diameter of 300 nm or more can also be used.
  • the pulse exposure is an exposure method of a method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of a short time (for example, a millisecond level or less).
  • the pulse width is preferably 100 nanoseconds (ns) or less, more preferably 50 nanoseconds or less, and even more preferably 30 nanoseconds or less.
  • the lower limit of the pulse width is not particularly limited, but may be 1 femtosecond (fs) or more, and may be 10 femtoseconds or more.
  • the frequency is preferably 1 kHz or higher, more preferably 2 kHz or higher, and even more preferably 4 kHz or higher.
  • the upper limit of the frequency is preferably 50 kHz or less, more preferably 20 kHz or less, and further preferably 10 kHz or less.
  • the maximum instantaneous illuminance is preferably 50,000,000,000 W / m 2 or more, more preferably 100,000,000 W / m 2 or more, and even more preferably 200,000,000 W / m 2 or more. Further, the upper limit of the maximum instantaneous illuminance is preferably 1000000000000 W / m 2 or less, more preferably 800000000 W / m 2 or less, and further preferably 500000000 W / m 2 or less.
  • the pulse width is the time during which light is irradiated in the pulse period.
  • the frequency is the number of pulse cycles per second.
  • the maximum instantaneous illuminance is the average illuminance within the time when the light is irradiated in the pulse cycle.
  • the pulse cycle is a cycle in which irradiation and pause of light in pulse exposure are set as one cycle.
  • the irradiation amount (exposure amount) is preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J / cm 2 , for example.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 0.05 J / cm 2 or more, further preferably 0.2 J / cm 2 or more, further preferably 0.5 J / cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 0.8 J / cm 2. It is even more preferably cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 1.0 J / cm 2 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2.0 J / cm 2 or less, and further preferably 1.5 J / cm 2 or less.
  • the exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and is preferably 50 mW / cm 2 to 10 W / cm 2 , for example.
  • the lower limit of the exposure illuminance is more preferably 500 mW / cm 2 or more, further preferably 800 mW / cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 1000 mW / cm 2 or more.
  • the upper limit of the exposure illuminance is preferably 10 W / cm 2 or less, more preferably 7 W / cm 2 or less, and further preferably 5 W / cm 2 or less.
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to the oxygen concentration performed in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially). It may be exposed in an oxygen-free environment), or may be exposed in a high oxygen atmosphere (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume) in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume.
  • the oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined with each other.
  • the oxygen concentration may be 10% by volume and the illuminance may be 1 W / cm 2
  • the oxygen concentration may be 35% by volume and the illuminance may be 2 W / cm 2 .
  • the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured, and pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be produced.
  • the colored composition layer after exposure is developed. That is, the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer is developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel).
  • the development and removal of the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution.
  • the colored composition layer of the unexposed portion in the exposure step is eluted in the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30 ° C.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the steps of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • Examples of the developing solution include organic solvents and alkaline developing solutions, and alkaline developing solutions are preferable.
  • the alkaline developer an alkaline aqueous solution (alkaline developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable.
  • the alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide.
  • Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene, etc.
  • examples thereof include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate.
  • the alkaline agent a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the developer may further contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • the developer may be once produced as a concentrated solution and diluted to a concentration required for use.
  • the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, but can be set in the range of, for example, 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development.
  • the rinsing is performed by supplying the rinsing liquid to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral edge of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion, the nozzle may be moved while gradually reducing the moving speed. By rinsing in this way, in-plane variation of the rinse can be suppressed. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually reducing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion.
  • Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments to complete the curing.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 150 ° C or less.
  • the upper limit of the heating temperature is more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, further preferably 100 ° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit of the heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it can promote the curing of the composition, but is more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, further preferably 75 ° C. or higher.
  • the heating time is preferably 1 minute or longer, more preferably 5 minutes or longer, and even more preferably 10 minutes or longer.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but 20 minutes or less is preferable from the viewpoint of productivity.
  • Post-baking is also preferably carried out in an atmosphere of an inert gas.
  • thermal polymerization can proceed with very high efficiency without being hindered by oxygen, and even when pixels are manufactured at a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process, flatness is achieved. It is possible to manufacture pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance.
  • the inert gas include nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas and the like, and nitrogen gas is preferable.
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of post-baking is preferably 100 ppm or less.
  • the step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern involves light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and 380 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm) with respect to the colored composition layer.
  • the exposure is performed by irradiating (more preferably i-line), and the additional exposure treatment (exposure after development) is performed with respect to the developed colored composition layer with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm (preferably light having a wavelength of 254 nm). It is preferable to irradiate and expose.
  • the coloring composition layer can be appropriately cured by the first exposure (exposure before development), and the entire coloring composition layer is cured almost completely by the next exposure (exposure after development).
  • the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured even under low temperature conditions to form pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance, adhesion, and rectangularness.
  • the coloring composition comprises, as a photopolymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more in a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol.
  • It contains a photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 2 mL / g cm or less at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol and an extinction coefficient of 1.0 ⁇ 10 3 mL / g cm or more at a wavelength of 254 nm. Is preferably used.
  • Exposure after development can be performed using, for example, an ultraviolet photoresist curing device.
  • the ultraviolet photoresist curing apparatus may irradiate light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm and other light (for example, i-line).
  • the exposure source spectrum when the additional exposure process is performed a continuous spectrum is preferable, and from the viewpoint of improving solvent resistance and adhesion to the substrate, it is preferable to have a spectral spectrum distribution different from that of the exposure before development.
  • the following radiation can be mentioned.
  • (b) and (c) are preferable in that improvement of solvent resistance and adhesion to the substrate can be achieved at a higher level.
  • the colorant (A) contains a dye
  • the dye generally absorbs ultraviolet rays or short-wavelength visible light and photodecomposes, so that radiation (c) having less high-intensity component is generated on the short-wavelength side. preferable.
  • the upper limit of the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm is not particularly limited, but it is preferably smaller than the peak intensity at the wavelength of 365 nm, and more preferably 3/4 or less.
  • the intensity is 1/4 or less, preferably 1/10 or less, more preferably 1/20 with respect to the smaller peak intensity of the peak intensity having a wavelength of 405 nm (h line) and the peak intensity having a wavelength of 436 nm (g line). Radiation that is.
  • the lower limit of the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm (j line) and the wavelength of 365 nm (i line) is not particularly limited.
  • the exposure before development is radiation containing a wavelength of 365 nm (i line), a wavelength of 405 nm (h line) and a wavelength of 436 nm (g line), and the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm (j line) is 365 nm (j line). Radiation that is less than 1/6 of the peak intensity in i-ray) is preferred.
  • Radiation exhibiting such spectral characteristics can be obtained, for example, by using a light source exhibiting the above spectral characteristics, or by using an ultraviolet cut filter or a band bus filter for radiation emitted from a high-pressure mercury lamp.
  • the irradiation amount (exposure amount) in the exposure after development is preferably 0.03 to 4.0 J / cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 3.5 J / cm 2 .
  • the difference between the wavelength of the light used in the exposure before development and the wavelength of the light used in the exposure after development is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm.
  • the display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention.
  • Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device.
  • Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)"
  • Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd.)” (Published in 1989) ”and so on.
  • liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)".
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "next-generation liquid crystal display technology".
  • the organic electroluminescence display device may have a light source composed of a white organic electroluminescence element.
  • the white organic electroluminescence device preferably has a tandem structure.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-045676 supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, "Frontiers of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection-", Technical Information Association It is described on pages 326 to 328, 2008 and the like.
  • the spectrum of white light emitted by the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in a blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), a green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and a yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm).
  • a blue region 430 nm to 485 nm
  • a green region 530 nm to 580 nm
  • a yellow region 580 nm to 620 nm.
  • those having a maximum emission peak in the red region 650 nm to 700 nm
  • the organic electroluminescence display device may have a lens on the color filter.
  • the shape of the lens various shapes derived by the optical system design can be taken, and examples thereof include a convex shape and a concave shape. For example, it is easy to improve the light condensing property by making it a concave shape (concave lens).
  • the lens may be in direct contact with the color filter, or another layer such as an adhesion layer or a flattening layer may be provided between the lens and the color filter.
  • the lens can also be arranged and used in the manner described in International Publication No. 2018/135189.
  • the coloring composition and the cured film of the present invention can also be used for a solid-state image sensor.
  • the configuration of the solid-state image sensor is not particularly limited as long as it has the cured film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state image sensor, and examples thereof include the following configurations.
  • a solid-state image pickup device CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.
  • a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like.
  • a configuration having a condensing means for example, a microlens or the like; the same applies hereinafter
  • the pixels of the color filter may be embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the refractive index of the partition wall is preferably lower than that of the pixel. Examples of the image pickup apparatus having such a structure are described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179757, International Publication No. 2018/043654, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0040656. Equipment is mentioned.
  • the image pickup device provided with the solid-state image pickup device can be used not only for a digital camera and an electronic device having an image pickup function (mobile phone or the like), but also for an in-vehicle camera or a surveillance camera.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G1 C. I. Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm) 10.40 parts by mass, Pigment Derivative 1 2.60 parts by mass, Dispersant 1 6.50 parts by mass, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 80 parts by mass. After mixing with .50 parts by mass, using zirconia beads with a diameter of 1 mm, disperse with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan) for 5 hours, and then filter with a filter with a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to disperse the pigment. Liquid P-G1 was prepared.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G2 After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 36, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G2.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G3 C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 58, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G3.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G4 (Pigment dispersion liquid P-G4) C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G4.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G5 C. I. 10.40 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 2.60 parts by mass of pigment derivative 3, 6.50 parts by mass of dispersant 3, and 80.50 parts by mass of PGMEA are mixed. Then, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G5. ..
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G6 (Pigment dispersion liquid P-G6) C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 3, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 3, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G6.
  • Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.)
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G7 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), and 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4. After mixing with 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan) for 5 hours, and then filtered with a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m. The pigment dispersion liquid P-G7 was prepared.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-G8 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-G8. Was prepared.
  • Eiger Mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-G9 C. I. After mixing 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 8.2 parts by mass of Dispersant 5, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 6, and 72.5 parts by mass of PGMEA. Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G9.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-G10 (Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-G10) C. I. After mixing 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 8.2 parts by mass of Dispersant 5, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 6, and 72.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are obtained. After dispersing for 5 hours with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.), the pigment dispersion liquid PG10 was prepared by filtering with a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y1 C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 2, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 2, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y1.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y2 After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y2.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y3 C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y3.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y4 C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y4.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y5 C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.2 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 3, 6.8 parts by mass of the dispersant 3, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm is used. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y5.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y6 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y6. Was prepared.
  • Eiger Mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y7 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to obtain a pigment dispersion P-Y7. Was prepared.
  • Eiger Mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y8 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y8. Was prepared.
  • Eiger Mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y9 C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y9. Was prepared.
  • Eiger Mill Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y10 (Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y10) C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y10.
  • Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y10.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y11 C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y11.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y12 C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm were used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y12.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y13 (Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y13) C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 1.75 parts by mass of pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y14.
  • Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y14.
  • Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y14 After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of the yellow pigment 1, 1.2 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of the dispersant 8, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm is used. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y14.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • Yellow pigment 1 Compound with the following structure (isoindoline compound)
  • Pigment derivative 1 A compound having the following structure
  • Pigment derivative 2 A compound having the following structure
  • Pigment derivative 3 A compound having the following structure
  • Pigment derivative 4 A compound having the following structure
  • Dispersant 1 Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 24000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value added to the side chain is the number of repeating units).
  • Dispersant 2 Resin with the following structure
  • Dispersant 3 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value added to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • Dispersant 4 Resin synthesized by the following method. 50 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 30 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 20 parts by mass of t-butyl methacrylate and 45.4 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) were charged into the reaction vessel, and the atmosphere gas was replaced with nitrogen gas. The inside of the reaction vessel is heated to 70 ° C., 6 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol is added, and 0.12 parts by mass of AIBN (azobisisobutyronitrile) is further added, and the reaction is carried out for 12 hours. I let you. It was confirmed by solid content measurement that 95% had reacted.
  • PMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • Dispersant 5 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method. 133 parts by mass of methoxypropyl acetate was charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, a condenser, a stirring blade, and a thermometer, and the temperature was raised to 100 ° C. while substituting with nitrogen. 40 parts by mass of N, N-dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, 160 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 61 parts by mass of methoxypropyl acetate, and 2,2'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) in the dropping tank.
  • Dispersant 6 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method.
  • 10 parts by mass of methacrylic acid 20 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 90 parts by mass of 2-methoxyethyl methacrylate, 40 parts by mass of tert-butyl methacrylate, n. -20 parts by mass of butyl acrylate, 20 parts by mass of tert-butyl acrylate, and 50 parts by mass of PGMEA were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. While heating the inside of the reaction vessel to 50 ° C.
  • Dispersant 7 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method. 10 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, 90 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 60 parts by mass of ethyl acrylate, 40 parts by mass of tert-butyl acrylate, 50 parts by mass of PGMEA in a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, temperature, condenser and stirrer. The parts were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. While heating the inside of the reaction vessel to 50 ° C. and stirring, 12 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol was added.
  • the temperature was raised to 90 ° C., and the reaction was carried out for 7 hours while adding a solution in which 0.1 part by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was added to 90 parts by mass of PGEMA. It was confirmed by measuring the non-volatile content that 95% of the monomers reacted.
  • 19 parts by mass of pyromellitic anhydride, 50 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.4 part by mass of 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene as a catalyst were added, and 7 at 100 ° C. Reacted for time.
  • Dispersant 8 BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by Big Chemie)
  • ⁇ Preparation of coloring composition The raw materials shown in the table below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered using a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 ⁇ m to prepare a colored composition.
  • I1 Irgure OXE02 (Oxime compound manufactured by BASF)
  • I2 Omnirad 2959 (hydroxyalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
  • I3 Omnirad 379 (aminoalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
  • I4 Compound with the following structure (oxime compound)
  • I5 Irgure OXE01 (Oxime compound manufactured by BASF)
  • E3 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 5.33 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 11000)
  • E4 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 3.95 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 10000)
  • E5 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 5.33 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 10000)
  • E6 40% by mass PGMEA solution of epoxy resin synthesized by the following method 5.1 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 0.8 parts by mass of N-phenylmaleimide, 0.6 parts by mass of styrene, 13.2 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate in a reaction vessel. The portion was added together with 78.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol methyl ether acetate and dissolved, and then the temperature was raised to 75 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. After the reaction product reached 75 ° C., 1.2 parts by mass of a thermal polymerization initiator (V-65, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and then the reaction was carried out for 12 hours.
  • V-65 thermal polymerization initiator
  • E7 40% by mass PGMEA solution of epoxy resin synthesized by the following method In a reaction vessel, 5.1 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 0.8 parts by mass of N-phenylmaleimide, 0.6 parts by mass of styrene, 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl 13.2 parts by mass of methylmethacrylate was added together with 78.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol methyl ether acetate to dissolve it, and then the temperature was raised to 75 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • Denacol EX-810 manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, molecular weight 174)
  • O1 OXT-221 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., 3-ethyl-3 ⁇ [(3-ethyloxetane-3-yl) methoxy] methyl ⁇ oxetane, a compound having an oxetane group)
  • M1 Aronix M-402 (Mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
  • M2 Compound with the following structure
  • M4 Compound with the following structure
  • M5 Mixture of compounds with the following structure
  • M6 Aronix M-350 (Trimethylolpropane Ethylene Oxide Modified Triacrylate, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
  • B1 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 12000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio).
  • B2 A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 11000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio).
  • G1 BYK-330 (Silicone-based surfactant manufactured by Big Chemie)
  • G2 A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 14000,% value indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%, fluorine-based surfactant)
  • G3 KF-6001 (Silicone-based surfactant manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • G4 Torre Silicone SH8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.)
  • Each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 ⁇ m, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, the exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film.
  • the obtained cured film was measured for the absorbance of light in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) using a reference as a glass substrate. Wavelength 1 and wavelength 2 were measured, respectively.
  • Wavelength 1 Of the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm, when the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 450 nm is 1, the wavelength on the long wave side where the absorptivity is 0.2
  • Wavelength 2 Light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm. Of the absorptivity for light, when the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 450 nm is 1, the wavelength on the short wave side where the absorptivity is 0.2.
  • each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 ⁇ m, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C.
  • the transmittance (T1) of the obtained cured film having a wavelength of 450 nm was measured.
  • the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was applied onto this cured film using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 ⁇ m, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. A coating film of a coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was formed, and a laminated film was formed.
  • the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels used for forming the blue pixels of Example 1001 described later was used.
  • the glass substrate on which this laminated film was formed was placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developer (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 60% diluted solution (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), and the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation formed on the cured film was developed and removed.
  • DW-30 type manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.
  • CD-2000 Fujijifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.
  • the above-mentioned glass substrate is fixed to a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the glass substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is supplied from above the center of rotation in a shower shape from above the center of rotation. It was rinsed and then spray dried.
  • MCPD-3000 manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • T2 the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 450 nm of the cured film after the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was developed and removed was measured.
  • the rate of change in transmittance was calculated from the following formula, and the color mixing was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • Change rate of transmittance (%)
  • Transmittance change rate is 5% or more Is
  • Thickness increase rate (%) [(viscosity (V 2 ) -viscosity (V 1 )) / viscosity (V 1 )] ⁇ 100 S: The thickening rate is less than 0.1% A: The thickening rate is 0.1% or more and less than 0.25% B: The thickening rate is 0.25% or more and less than 1% C: Increased The viscosity is 1% or more and less than 2.5%. D: The viscosity is 2.5% or more and less than 5%. E: The viscosity is 5% or more.
  • the examples were superior to the comparative examples in the evaluation of color mixing. Further, the cured film obtained by using the coloring composition of the example had a high transmittance of light in the vicinity of a wavelength of 500 nm, and was excellent in sensitivity as a green pixel. The same effect was obtained even when the surfactant of Example 1 was changed to a surfactant (KF-6001, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • Example 1001 A coloring composition for forming green pixels was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.5 ⁇ m. Then, using a hot plate, it was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Next, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at 200 mJ / cm 2 via a mask with a 3 ⁇ m square dot pattern. Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water.
  • FPA-3000i5 + manufactured by Canon Inc.
  • a green coloring pattern (green pixel) was formed by heating at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes using a hot plate.
  • the coloring composition 1 for forming red pixels and the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels are sequentially patterned to form a red coloring pattern (red pixel) and a blue coloring pattern (blue pixel), respectively, to form a structure.
  • the coloring composition for forming green pixels the coloring composition of Example 1 was used.
  • the coloring composition 1 for forming red pixels and the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels will be described later.
  • the obtained structure was incorporated into an organic electroluminescence display device according to a known method. This organic electroluminescence display device had suitable image recognition ability.
  • the pigment dispersion liquid DR-1 As the pigment dispersion liquid DR-1, the one prepared by the following method was used. C. I. After mixing 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Red 264, 21.5 parts by mass of the dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of the dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DR-1.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the pigment dispersion liquid DY-1 As the pigment dispersion liquid DY-1, the one prepared by the following method was used. C. I. After mixing 23.5 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 7 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 3 parts by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, the diameter is 1 mm. The zirconia beads of No. 1 were dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DY-1.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the pigment dispersion liquid DB-1 As the pigment dispersion liquid DB-1, the one prepared by the following method was used. C. I. 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Blue 15: 6, 21.5 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300, manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed. Then, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered with a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DB-1.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the pigment dispersion liquid DV-1 As the pigment dispersion liquid DV-1, the one prepared by the following method was used. C. I. After mixing 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Violet 23, 21.5 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DV-1.
  • Eiger mill Mini Model M-250MKII manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the dispersant 11 those prepared by the following methods were used. After charging 196 parts by mass of PGMEA into a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer in a separable 4-neck flask, the temperature was raised to 80 ° C., and the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with nitrogen.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a coloring composition with which it is possible to form a cured film in which mixing with other colors is suppressed; a cured film; a structure body; a color filter; and a display device. The coloring composition includes a coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group. The coloring agent includes color index Pigment Green 7, and a yellow coloring agent, and when the degree of absorption of the coloring agent in relation to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is defined as 1, the wavelength at which the degree of absorption is 0.2 is present within the wavelength range of 540-610 nm, inclusive.

Description

着色組成物、硬化膜、構造体、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置Coloring compositions, cured films, structures, color filters and display devices
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。より詳しくは、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成などに用いられる着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた硬化膜、構造体、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a coloring composition. More specifically, the present invention relates to a coloring composition used for forming green pixels of a color filter and the like. The present invention also relates to a cured film, a structure, a color filter and a display device using a coloring composition.
 各種表示装置において、表示画像のカラー化のためにカラーフィルタが一般的に用いられている。また、カラーフィルタにおいては、複数の顔料を併用して分光を調整する試みが行われている。 In various display devices, color filters are generally used for colorizing displayed images. Further, in a color filter, an attempt is made to adjust the spectroscopy by using a plurality of pigments in combination.
 カラーフィルタの緑色の画素形成用の着色組成物には、着色剤として緑色着色剤を含むものが用いられている。例えば、特許文献1の実施例1~7には、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7およびカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150を含む着色剤と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む着色組成物を用いて緑色画素を形成することが記載されている。 The coloring composition for forming green pixels of the color filter contains a green coloring agent as a coloring agent. For example, Examples 1 to 7 of Patent Document 1 use a coloring composition containing a coloring agent containing Color Index Pigment Green 7 and Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator to be green. It is described to form a pixel.
特開2014-041341号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-041341
 一般的にカラーフィルタは、複数色の画素を有している。このような複数色の画素を有するカラーフィルタは、各色の画素形成用の着色組成物を順次パターン形成して各色の画素を形成して製造される。 Generally, a color filter has pixels of a plurality of colors. Such a color filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming a pattern of coloring compositions for forming pixels of each color to form pixels of each color.
 近年においては、耐熱性の低い部材(例えば、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示素子などの有機半導体素子)上にカラーフィルタを形成することもある。このような部材は耐熱性が低いため、例えば150℃以下の低温プロセスでカラーフィルタの画素を形成して、支持体への熱的ダメージを抑制することが望ましい。 In recent years, a color filter may be formed on a member having low heat resistance (for example, an organic semiconductor element such as an organic electroluminescence display element). Since such a member has low heat resistance, it is desirable to form pixels of a color filter in, for example, a low temperature process of 150 ° C. or lower to suppress thermal damage to the support.
 しかしながら、低温プロセスで画素を形成した場合、画素の硬化度合が不十分なことがあり、他色の画素を形成する際に、他色の着色組成物との混色が生じて分光特性が変動しやすい傾向にあった。 However, when pixels are formed by a low temperature process, the degree of curing of the pixels may be insufficient, and when forming pixels of other colors, color mixing with a coloring composition of another color occurs and the spectral characteristics fluctuate. It tended to be easy.
 また、本発明者の検討によれば、特許文献1に記載された着色組成物においても、他色との混色についてさらなる改善の余地があることが分かった。 Further, according to the study of the present inventor, it was found that there is room for further improvement in the color mixing with other colors even in the coloring composition described in Patent Document 1.
 よって、本発明の目的は、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる着色組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明の目的は、前述の着色組成物を用いた硬化膜、構造体、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed. Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured film, a structure, a color filter and a display device using the above-mentioned coloring composition.
 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する着色組成物を用いることで上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。本発明は以下を提供する。
 <1> 着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤と、環状エーテル基を有する化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7と、黄色着色剤と、を含み、
 上記着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲に存在する、
 着色組成物。
 <2> 上記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物を含む、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
 <3> 上記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位を含む化合物を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物。
 <4> 上記環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位、ノボラック構造の繰り返し単位、または、(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位である、<3>に記載の着色組成物。
 <5> 上記環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、主鎖構造中に脂肪族炭化水素環を含む、<3>または<4>に記載の着色組成物。
 <6> 上記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物とオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <7> 上記着色組成物の全固形分中における上記環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量が1質量%以上である、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <8> 上記着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が470nm以上520nm以下の波長範囲と、540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲のそれぞれに存在する、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <9> カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して黄色着色剤を25~600質量部含有する、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <10> 上記黄色着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー129、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー139、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150およびカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー185から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <11> 上記着色剤は、更に、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン36、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン58およびカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン59から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <12> 上記着色組成物の全固形分中における上記着色剤の含有量が15質量%以上である、<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <13> 全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するために用いられる、<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <14> <1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜。
 <15> 緑色画素と赤色画素と青色画素とを有する構造体であって、上記緑色画素は<1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物を用いて得られるものである、構造体。
 <16> <14>に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。
 <17> <14>に記載の硬化膜を有する表示装置。
According to the study of the present inventor, it has been found that the above object can be achieved by using the coloring composition described later, and the present invention has been completed. The present invention provides:
<1> A coloring composition containing a colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group.
The colorant comprises Color Index Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant.
The coloring composition exists in a wavelength range in which the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.2 is 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less, when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1.
Coloring composition.
<2> The coloring composition according to <1>, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more.
<3> The coloring composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group.
<4> The colored composition according to <3>, wherein the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is a repeating unit having a polyether structure, a repeating unit having a novolak structure, or a repeating unit having a (meth) acrylic structure.
<5> The coloring composition according to <3> or <4>, wherein the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring in the main chain structure.
<6> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group.
<7> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 1% by mass or more.
<8> The coloring composition exists in each of the wavelength range in which the absorbance is 0.2 in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 520 nm or less and the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <7>.
<9> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, which contains 25 to 600 parts by mass of a yellow colorant with respect to 100 parts by mass of Color Index Pigment Green 7.
<10> The yellow colorant includes any one of <1> to <9>, which comprises at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 129, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150, and Color Index Pigment Yellow 185. The coloring composition according to one.
<11> The colorant is further described in any one of <1> to <10>, further comprising at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Green 36, Color Index Pigment Green 58, and Color Index Pigment Green 59. Coloring composition.
<12> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 15% by mass or more.
<13> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <12>, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
<14> A cured film obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <13>.
<15> A structure having a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel, and the green pixel is obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <13>. ,Structure.
<16> The color filter having the cured film according to <14>.
<17> A display device having the cured film according to <14>.
 本発明によれば、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる着色組成物を提供することができる。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた硬化膜、構造体、カラーフィルタおよび表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed. The present invention can also provide a cured film, a structure, a color filter and a display device using the coloring composition.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の合計質量をいう。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、アリルおよびメタリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)および数平均分子量(Mn)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)により測定したポリスチレン換算値として定義される。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation not describing substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent (atomic group) as well as a group having no substituent (atomic group). Is. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
As used herein, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. The light used for exposure generally includes an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, active rays such as electron beams, or radiation.
The numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
As used herein, the total solid content means the total mass of all the components of the composition excluding the solvent.
As used herein, "(meth) acrylate" represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either, and "(meth) acrylic" represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either. ) Allyl ”represents both allyl and / or methacrylic, and“ (meth) acryloyl ”represents both / or either acryloyl and methacrylic acid.
In the present specification, the term "process" is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as polystyrene-equivalent values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤と、環状エーテル基を有する化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7と、黄色着色剤と、を含み、
 上記着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲に存在することを特徴とする。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group.
The colorant comprises Color Index Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant.
The coloring composition is characterized in that the wavelength at which the absorbance is 0.2 exists in the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1.
 本発明の着色組成物によれば、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。特に、150℃以下(好ましくは120℃以下、更に好ましくは100℃以下)の低温で硬化膜を形成した場合であっても、他色との混色の抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。 According to the coloring composition of the present invention, it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed. In particular, even when the cured film is formed at a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably 120 ° C. or lower, more preferably 100 ° C. or lower), it is possible to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed. ..
 このような効果が得られる詳細な理由は不明であるが、着色組成物が上記特定の分光特性を有し、着色剤としてカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7と黄色着色剤とを含むものを用いることにより、顔料同士の相互作用により、熱が伝わりやすくなり、着色組成物を加熱して硬化する際に、着色組成物の硬化が速やかに進行し、その結果、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成できると推測される。このため、本発明の着色組成物によれば、他色との混色が抑制された硬化膜を形成することができると推測される。 Although the detailed reason why such an effect is obtained is unknown, by using a coloring composition having the above-mentioned specific spectral characteristics and containing the color index pigment green 7 and the yellow coloring agent as the coloring agent, the coloring composition has the above-mentioned specific spectral characteristics. Due to the interaction between the pigments, heat is easily transferred, and when the coloring composition is heated and cured, the curing of the coloring composition proceeds rapidly, and as a result, the coloring composition is sufficiently cured even when heated at a relatively low temperature. It is presumed that a cured film can be formed. Therefore, according to the coloring composition of the present invention, it is presumed that a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is suppressed can be formed.
 また、この着色組成物は、上述した所定の吸光度の特性を満たすことにより、赤色や青色などの他色との色分離性に優れた分光特性を有する緑色の画素などに適した硬化膜を形成することができる。 Further, by satisfying the above-mentioned predetermined absorbance characteristics, this coloring composition forms a cured film suitable for green pixels having spectral characteristics excellent in color separation from other colors such as red and blue. can do.
 ある波長λにおける吸光度Aλは、以下の式(Ab1)により定義される。
 Aλ=-log(Tλ/100)   ・・・(Ab1)
 Aλは、波長λにおける吸光度であり、Tλは、波長λにおける透過率(%)である。
The absorbance Aλ at a certain wavelength λ is defined by the following equation (Ab1).
Aλ = -log (Tλ / 100) ... (Ab1)
Aλ is the absorbance at the wavelength λ, and Tλ is the transmittance (%) at the wavelength λ.
 本発明において、吸光度の値は、溶液の状態で測定した値であってもよく、着色組成物を用いて製膜した硬化膜の値であってもよい。膜の状態で吸光度を測定する場合は、ガラス基板上にスピンコート等の方法によって着色組成物を塗布し、ホットプレート等を用いて100℃、2分間乾燥し、次いで、超高圧水銀ランプを用いて、光照度20mW/cm、露光量100mJ/cmの条件で露光し、次いで、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、常温まで放冷して得られた厚さ1.5μmの膜(硬化膜)を用いて測定することが好ましい。吸光度は従来公知の分光光度計を用いて測定できる。 In the present invention, the absorbance value may be a value measured in a solution state or a value of a cured film formed by using a coloring composition. When measuring the absorbance in the state of a film, apply the coloring composition on a glass substrate by a method such as spin coating, dry at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate or the like, and then use an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. Then, the film was exposed under the conditions of a light illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 , then heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to room temperature to obtain a film having a thickness of 1.5 μm. It is preferable to measure using (cured film). Absorbance can be measured using a conventionally known spectrophotometer.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲に存在する。本発明の着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が470nm以上520nm以下の波長範囲と、540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention has a wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less in which the absorbance is 0.2 when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. The coloring composition of the present invention exists in each of the wavelength range in which the absorbance is 0.2 in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 520 nm or less and the wavelength range of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. Is preferable.
 上記の吸光度が0.2となる短波長側の波長(以下、波長λ1ともいう)は、色分離性の観点から470nm以上515nm以下の波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475nm以上500nm以下の波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480nm以上495nm以下の波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましく、480nm以上490nm以下の波長範囲に存在することが特に好ましい。また、吸光度が0.2となる長波長側の波長(以下、波長λ2ともいう)は、色分離性の観点から550nm以上600nm以下の波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、555nm以上600nm以下の波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、570nm以上590nm以下の波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。 The wavelength on the short wavelength side (hereinafter, also referred to as wavelength λ1) at which the absorbance is 0.2 is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 nm or more and 515 nm or less from the viewpoint of color separation, and is preferably 475 nm or more and 500 nm or less. It is more preferably present in the range, further preferably present in the wavelength range of 480 nm or more and 495 nm or less, and particularly preferably present in the wavelength range of 480 nm or more and 490 nm or less. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side having an absorbance of 0.2 (hereinafter, also referred to as wavelength λ2) is preferably present in the wavelength range of 550 nm or more and 600 nm or less from the viewpoint of color separation, and has a wavelength of 555 nm or more and 600 nm or less. It is more preferably present in the range, and even more preferably in the wavelength range of 570 nm or more and 590 nm or less.
 波長λ2と波長λ1との波長差(λ2-λ1)は色分離性の観点から40~120nmであることが好ましく、60~110nmであることがより好ましく、80~100nmであることが更に好ましい。 The wavelength difference (λ2-λ1) between the wavelength λ2 and the wavelength λ1 is preferably 40 to 120 nm, more preferably 60 to 110 nm, and even more preferably 80 to 100 nm from the viewpoint of color separation.
 本発明の着色組成物は、波長400~700nmの波長の光に対する吸光度のうち、波長495nm以上550nm未満の波長範囲に吸光度の最小値を有することが好ましく、505nm以上540nm以下の波長範囲に吸光度の最小値を有することがより好ましく、515nm以上530nm以下の波長範囲に吸光度の最小値を有することが更に好ましい。以下、波長400~700nmの波長の光に対する吸光度のうち、吸光度の最小値を示す波長のことを波長λminともいう。 The colored composition of the present invention preferably has the minimum absorbance in the wavelength range of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm, and has the absorbance in the wavelength range of 505 nm or more and 540 nm or less, among the absorbances for light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm. It is more preferable to have a minimum value, and it is further preferable to have a minimum value of absorbance in the wavelength range of 515 nm or more and 530 nm or less. Hereinafter, the wavelength showing the minimum value of the absorbance among the absorbances for light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is also referred to as a wavelength λmin.
 波長λminと波長λ1との波長差(波長λmin-λ1)は、色分離性の観点から15~60nmであることが好ましく、15~55nmであることがより好ましく、30~50nmであることが更に好ましい。また、波長λ2と波長λminとの波長差(波長λ2-波長λmin)は、色分離性の観点から20~80nmであることが好ましく、30~70nmであることがより好ましく、40~60nmであることが更に好ましい。 The wavelength difference between the wavelength λmin and the wavelength λ1 (wavelength λmin-λ1) is preferably 15 to 60 nm, more preferably 15 to 55 nm, and further preferably 30 to 50 nm from the viewpoint of color separation. preferable. Further, the wavelength difference between the wavelength λ2 and the wavelength λmin (wavelength λ2-wavelength λmin) is preferably 20 to 80 nm, more preferably 30 to 70 nm, and 40 to 60 nm from the viewpoint of color separation. Is even more preferable.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜厚が0.6~3.0μmの硬化膜を形成した際に、膜の厚み方向における495nm以上550nm未満の波長の光に対する透過率の最大値は65%以上であることが好ましく、70%以上であることがより好ましく、75%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記膜の495nm以上550nm未満の波長の光に対する平均透過率は60%以上であることが好ましく、65%以上であることがより好ましく、70%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記膜の波長450nmの光に対する透過率は10%以下であることが好ましく、5%以下であることがより好ましく、2%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記膜の400nm以上450nm以下の波長の光に対する平均透過率は10%以下であることが好ましく、5%以下であることがより好ましく、1%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記膜の540nm以上610nm以下の波長の光に対する平均透過率は60%以下であることが好ましく、50%以下であることがより好ましく、40%以下であることが更に好ましい。
In the coloring composition of the present invention, when a cured film having a film thickness of 0.6 to 3.0 μm is formed, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm in the thickness direction of the film is 65% or more. It is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 75% or more, and even more preferably 75% or more.
Further, the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 65% or more, still more preferably 70% or more.
Further, the transmittance of the film with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 2% or less.
Further, the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 1% or less.
Further, the average transmittance of the film for light having a wavelength of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less is preferably 60% or less, more preferably 50% or less, still more preferably 40% or less.
 着色組成物の吸光度などの値を上述した範囲に調整するには、着色組成物の全固形分中におけるカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7の含有量、黄色着色剤の種類及び含有量、着色剤中におけるカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7と黄色着色剤の比率、着色組成物中の着色剤の含有量などを変更することで適宜調整することができる。 To adjust the values such as the absorbance of the coloring composition to the above range, the content of Color Index Pigment Green 7 in the total solid content of the coloring composition, the type and content of the yellow colorant, and the color in the colorant. It can be appropriately adjusted by changing the ratio of the index pigment green 7 and the yellow colorant, the content of the colorant in the coloring composition, and the like.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter, and more preferably can be used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
 本発明の着色組成物は、表示装置用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができる。より詳しくは、表示装置用のカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、表示装置用のカラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。表示装置の種類としては特に限定はないが、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などの有機半導体素子を光源として有する表示装置などが挙げられる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a coloring composition for a display device. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a display device, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter for a display device. The type of the display device is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a display device having an organic semiconductor element as a light source such as an organic electroluminescence display device.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子用の着色組成物として用いることもできる。より詳しくは、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いることができる。 Further, the coloring composition of the present invention can also be used as a coloring composition for a solid-state image sensor. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor, and more preferably as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter for a solid-state image sensor.
 本発明の着色組成物は、全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度(好ましくは、120℃以下の温度)で硬化膜を形成するために用いられるものであることも好ましい。なお、本明細書において全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するとは、着色組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程の全てを150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。 It is also preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower (preferably a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower) throughout the entire process. In the present specification, forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process means that all the steps of forming a cured film using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower.
 本発明の着色組成物によって形成される硬化膜および画素の厚さは、0.5~3.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は0.8μm以上が好ましく、1.0μm以上がより好ましく、1.1μm以上がさらに好ましい。上限は2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.8μm以下がさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the cured film and pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.8 μm or more, more preferably 1.0 μm or more, still more preferably 1.1 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, still more preferably 1.8 μm or less.
 また、本発明の着色組成物によって形成される画素の線幅(パターンサイズ)は、2.0~10.0μmであることが好ましい。上限は7.5μm以下が好ましく、5.0μm以下がより好ましく、4.0μm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は2.25μm以上が好ましく、2.5μm以上がより好ましく、2.75μm以上がさらに好ましい。 Further, the line width (pattern size) of the pixels formed by the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 2.0 to 10.0 μm. The upper limit is preferably 7.5 μm or less, more preferably 5.0 μm or less, still more preferably 4.0 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 2.25 μm or more, more preferably 2.5 μm or more, still more preferably 2.75 μm or more.
 以下、本発明の着色組成物について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the coloring composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は着色剤を含有する。本発明の着色組成物に用いられる着色剤は、カラーインデックス(C.I.)ピグメントグリーン7と、黄色着色剤とを含む。C.I.ピグメントグリーン7は緑色着色剤である。
<< Colorant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent. The colorant used in the coloring composition of the present invention includes a Color Index (CI) Pigment Green 7 and a yellow colorant. C. I. Pigment Green 7 is a green colorant.
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の平均一次粒子径は30~200nmであることが好ましく、30~150nmであることがより好ましく、30~100nmであることが更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7などの顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた画像写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本明細書における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。 C. I. The average primary particle size of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 30 to 200 nm, more preferably 30 to 150 nm, and even more preferably 30 to 100 nm. In addition, in this specification, C.I. I. The primary particle size of a pigment such as Pigment Green 7 can be determined from an image photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle-equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle diameter in the present specification is an arithmetic average value of the primary particle diameter for the primary particles of 400 pigments. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without aggregation.
 黄色着色剤は、顔料および染料のいずれでもよいが、顔料であることが好ましい。顔料の平均一次粒子径は30~200nmであることが好ましく、30~150nmであることがより好ましく、30~100nmであることが更に好ましい。 The yellow colorant may be either a pigment or a dye, but is preferably a pigment. The average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 30 to 200 nm, more preferably 30 to 150 nm, and even more preferably 30 to 100 nm.
 黄色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the yellow colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35: 1,36, 36: 1,37,37: 1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97, 98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179, 180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236 and the like can be mentioned.
 また、黄色着色剤としては、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Further, as the yellow colorant, a nickel azobarbituric acid complex having the following structure can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 また、黄色着色剤として、特開2017-201003号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-197719号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-171912号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0137~0276に記載の化合物、特開2017-171913号公報の段落番号0010~0062、0138~0295に記載の化合物、特開2017-171914号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0139~0190に記載の化合物、特開2017-171915号公報の段落番号0010~0065、0142~0222に記載の化合物、特開2013-054339号公報の段落番号0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-026228号公報の段落番号0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062644号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2018-203798号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062578号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6432076号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-155881号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-111757号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-040835号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2017-197640号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2016-145282号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-085565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-021139号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209614号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209435号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-181015号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-061622号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-032486号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2012-226110号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074987号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074986号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074985号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-050420号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-031281号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特公昭48-032765号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-073695号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073696号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073697号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073698号公報に記載のメチン染料、韓国公開特許第10-2014-0034963号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-095706号公報に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201920495号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033521号公報に記載のキノフタロン二量体、特開2020-023652号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物を用いることもできる。また、これらの化合物を多量体化したものも、色価向上の観点から好ましく用いられる。黄色着色剤として、下記式(QP1)で表される化合物、下記式(QP2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Further, as the yellow colorant, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, and paragraph numbers 0011 to 0062 and 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 are described. , The compounds described in paragraphs 0010 to 0062, 0138 to 0295 of JP-A-2017-171913, the compounds described in paragraphs 0011 to 0062, 0139-0190 of JP-A-2017-171914, JP-A-2017. -The compounds described in paragraphs 0010 to 0065 and 0142 to 0222 of JP-A-171915, the quinophthalone compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-054339, paragraph numbers 0013 to JP-A-2014-0226228. The quinophthalone compound described in 0058, the isoindolin compound described in JP-A-2018-062644, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-203798, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-062578, Patent No. 6432076. The quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-155881, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-11175, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-040835, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-040835, JP-A-2017. -Kinophthalone compound described in JP-A-197640, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2016-145282, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2014-0856565, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2014-021139, special The quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-209614, the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-209435, the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-181015, and the quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-061622. , A quinophthalone compound described in JP2013-032486, a quinophthalone compound described in JP2012-226110A, a quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074987, and a quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-081565. Kinophthalone compound, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074986, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074985, quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-054020, JP-A. The quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-031281, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-48-032765, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2019-008014, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-6607427, JP-A-B. The methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073695, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073696, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073697, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073698, Compounds described in Korean Publication No. 10-2014-0034963, compounds described in JP-A-2017-095076, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201920495, compounds described in Patent No. 6607427. , The quinophthalone dimer described in JP-A-2020-033521 and the isoindrin compound described in JP-A-2020-023652 can also be used. Further, a multimerized version of these compounds is also preferably used from the viewpoint of improving the color value. As the yellow colorant, a compound represented by the following formula (QP1) and a compound represented by the following formula (QP2) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(QP1)中、X~X16は各々独立に水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Zは炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表す。式(QP1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許第6443711号公報の段落番号0016に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
In the formula (QP1), X 1 to X 16 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP1) include the compound described in paragraph No. 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(QP2)中、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立にハロゲン原子を示す。n、mは0~6の整数、pは0~5の整数を表す。(n+m)は1以上である。式(QP2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許6432077号公報の段落番号0047~0048に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 In the formula (QP2), Y1 to Y3 independently represent halogen atoms. n and m represent integers of 0 to 6, and p represents an integer of 0 to 5. (N + m) is 1 or more. Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (QP2) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
 黄色着色剤は、C.I.ピグメントイエロー129、C.I.ピグメントイエロー138、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150およびC.I.ピグメントイエロー185から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、C.I.ピグメントイエロー129、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150およびC.I.ピグメントイエロー185から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることがより好ましく、耐光性の観点からC.I.ピグメントイエロー150が更に好ましい。黄色着色剤は、他色との色分離の観点からC.I.ピグメントイエロー185を用いることも好ましい。 The yellow colorant is C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably at least one selected from C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 and C.I. I. It is more preferable that it is at least one selected from Pigment Yellow 185, and from the viewpoint of light resistance, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 is even more preferred. The yellow colorant is C.I. I. It is also preferable to use Pigment Yellow 185.
 黄色着色剤は、1種のみであってもよく、2種以上併用してもよい。黄色着色剤を1種のみ用いる場合は、着色組成物の保存安定性を向上できる。黄色着色剤を2種以上併用する場合は、色味を調整しやすい。 The yellow colorant may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When only one kind of yellow colorant is used, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be improved. When two or more yellow colorants are used in combination, it is easy to adjust the color.
 本発明で用いられる黄色着色剤の好ましい態様としては以下の態様Y1、態様Y2、態様Y3が挙げられる。混色の抑制及び保存安定性の観点から以下の態様Y1であることが好ましい。また、他色との色分離の観点から以下の態様Y3であることも好ましい。 Preferred embodiments of the yellow colorant used in the present invention include the following aspects Y1, aspect Y2, and aspect Y3. From the viewpoint of suppressing color mixing and storage stability, the following aspect Y1 is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of color separation from other colors, the following aspect Y3 is also preferable.
 態様Y1:黄色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントイエロー150のみである態様。
 態様Y2:黄色着色剤が、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150と、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150以外の黄色着色剤を含む態様。
 態様Y3:黄色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントイエロー185のみである態様。
Embodiment Y1: The yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. A mode in which only Pigment Yellow 150 is used.
Aspect Y2: The yellow colorant is C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150 and C.I. I. An embodiment containing a yellow colorant other than Pigment Yellow 150.
Aspect Y3: The yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. A mode in which Pigment Yellow 185 is the only option.
 なお、黄色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントイエロー150のみである場合とは、黄色着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー150の含有量が99.5質量%以上であることを意味し、99.9質量%以上であることが好ましい。また、黄色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントイエロー185のみである場合とは、黄色着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー185の含有量が99.5質量%以上であることを意味し、99.9質量%以上であることが好ましい。 It should be noted that the yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. When only Pigment Yellow 150 is used, C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Yellow 150 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more. Further, the yellow colorant is substantially C.I. I. When only Pigment Yellow 185 is used, C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Yellow 185 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
 上記態様Y2の黄色着色剤において、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150以外の黄色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー129、ピグメントイエロー138、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139、C.I.ピグメントイエロー185などが挙げられ、色分離性及び耐光性の観点からC.I.ピグメントイエロー129、C.I.ピグメントイエロー139およびC.I.ピグメントイエロー185から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。 In the yellow colorant of the above aspect Y2, C.I. I. Examples of the yellow colorant other than Pigment Yellow 150 include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 and the like, and C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 139 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Yellow 185.
 上記態様Y2の黄色着色剤においては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150以外の黄色着色剤の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150の100質量部に対し、0.1~200質量部であることが好ましく、1~50質量部であることがより好ましく、10~125質量部であることが更に好ましい。 In the yellow colorant of the above aspect Y2, C.I. I. The content of yellow colorants other than Pigment Yellow 150 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 200 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass, and further preferably 10 to 125 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150.
 本発明の着色組成物は、更に、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤(以下、他の緑色着色剤ともいう)を含有することができる。 The coloring composition of the present invention further comprises C.I. I. A green colorant other than Pigment Green 7 (hereinafter, also referred to as another green colorant) can be contained.
 他の緑色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等が挙げられる。また、他の緑色着色剤としては、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料も挙げられる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、他の緑色着色剤としては、中国特許出願第106909027号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102395号に記載のリン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2018-180023号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-038958号公報に記載の化合物なども挙げられる。また、他の緑色着色剤としては、特開2020-076995号公報に記載のコアシェル型色素も使用することができる。 Other green colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Green 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66 and the like. As other green colorants, halogens having an average of 10 to 14 halogen atoms in one molecule, an average of 8 to 12 bromine atoms, and an average of 2 to 5 chlorine atoms. Halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigments can also be mentioned. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. Examples of other green colorants include the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester described in International Publication No. 2012/102395 as a ligand, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-008014. Examples thereof include the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, and the compounds described in JP-A-2019-038958. Further, as another green colorant, the core-shell type dye described in JP-A-2020-07695 can also be used.
 他の緑色着色剤は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58およびC.I.ピグメントグリーン59から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36であることがより好ましい。 Other green colorants are C.I. I. Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Green 59, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 is more preferred.
 本発明で用いられる緑色着色剤の好ましい態様としては以下の態様G1、態様G2が挙げられ、色分離性の観点から以下の態様G1であることが好ましい。 Preferred embodiments of the green colorant used in the present invention include the following embodiments G1 and G2, and the following embodiments G1 are preferable from the viewpoint of color separability.
 態様G1:緑色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7のみである態様。
 態様G2:緑色着色剤が、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7と、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤を含む態様。
Aspect G1: The green colorant is substantially C.I. I. A mode in which only Pigment Green 7 is used.
Aspect G2: The green colorant is C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. An embodiment containing a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7.
 なお、緑色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7のみである場合とは、緑色着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7の含有量が99.5質量%以上であることを意味し、99.9質量%以上であることが好ましい。 It should be noted that the green colorant is substantially C.I. I. The case where only Pigment Green 7 is used means that C.I. I. It means that the content of Pigment Green 7 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
 上記態様G2の緑色着色剤において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58およびC.I.ピグメントグリーン59から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36であることがより好ましい。他の緑色着色剤は、堅牢性、安定性の観点からC.I.ピグメントグリーン36のみであることが好ましい。すなわち、上記態様G2の緑色着色剤は、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン36とで構成されていることが好ましい。なお、緑色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン36とで構成されている場合とは、緑色着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン36との合計の含有量が99.5質量%以上であることを意味し、99.9質量%以上であることが好ましい。 In the green colorant of the above aspect G2, C.I. I. Examples of green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 include C.I. I. Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 and C.I. I. It is preferably at least one selected from Pigment Green 59, and C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 is more preferred. Other green colorants are C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 only is preferred. That is, the green colorant of the above aspect G2 is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It is preferably composed of Pigment Green 36. It should be noted that the green colorant is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When it is composed of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It means that the total content with the pigment green 36 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
 また、上記態様G2の緑色着色剤は、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン59とで構成されていることも好ましい。この態様によれば、ピーク透過率が高くなり、より輝度の高い硬化膜を形成することができる。なお、緑色着色剤が、実質的にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン59とで構成されている場合とは、緑色着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントグリーン59との合計の含有量が99.5質量%以上であることを意味し、99.9質量%以上であることが好ましい。 Further, the green colorant of the above aspect G2 is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It is also preferable that it is composed of Pigment Green 59. According to this aspect, the peak transmittance is increased, and a cured film having higher brightness can be formed. It should be noted that the green colorant is substantially C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When it is composed of Pigment Green 59, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. It means that the total content with Pigment Green 59 is 99.5% by mass or more, and preferably 99.9% by mass or more.
 上記態様G2の緑色着色剤において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対し、0.1~5000質量部であることが好ましく、0.1~3000質量部であることがより好ましく、0.1~2000質量部であることが更に好ましく、0.1~500質量部であることがより一層好ましく、10~300質量部であることが更に一層好ましく、25~200質量部であることが特に好ましい。また、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤としてC.I.ピグメントグリーン36を用いる場合、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対し、0.1~500質量部であることが好ましく、10~300質量部であることがより好ましく、25~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。また、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤としてC.I.ピグメントグリーン59を用いる場合、C.I.ピグメントグリーン59の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対し、0.1~5000質量部であることが好ましい。下限は10質量部以上であることがより好ましく、25質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は3000質量部以下であることがより好ましく、1500質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。 In the green colorant of the above aspect G2, C.I. I. The content of green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 5000 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 3000 parts by mass, and further preferably 0.1 to 2000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. , 0.1 to 500 parts by mass is even more preferable, 10 to 300 parts by mass is even more preferable, and 25 to 200 parts by mass is particularly preferable. In addition, C.I. I. As a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. When using Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Green 36 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 300 parts by mass, and further preferably 25 to 200 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. In addition, C.I. I. As a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. When using Pigment Green 59, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Green 59 is C.I. I. It is preferably 0.1 to 5000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. The lower limit is more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 25 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 3000 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 1500 parts by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、緑色着色剤および黄色着色剤以外の着色剤(以下、他の着色剤ともいう)を含有していてもよい。着色剤中における他の着色剤の含有量は30質量%以下であることが好ましく、25質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、色分離性の観点から他の着色剤を実質的に含有しないことが特に好ましい。なお、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる着色剤が、他の着色剤を実質的に含有しない場合とは、着色剤中における他の着色剤の含有量が0.5質量%未満であることを意味し、0.1質量%未満であることが好ましく、他の着色剤を含有しないことが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a coloring agent other than the green coloring agent and the yellow coloring agent (hereinafter, also referred to as other coloring agents). The content of the other colorants in the colorant is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less, further preferably 10% by mass or less, and from the viewpoint of color separability. It is particularly preferred that it contains substantially no other colorants. When the colorant used in the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain another colorant, the content of the other colorant in the colorant is less than 0.5% by mass. It is preferably less than 0.1% by mass, and more preferably does not contain other colorants.
 他の着色剤としては、赤色着色剤、青色着色剤、紫色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などの有彩色着色剤が挙げられる。他の着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。顔料と染料とを併用してもよい。顔料としては以下に示すものが挙げられる。 Examples of other colorants include chromatic colorants such as red colorants, blue colorants, purple colorants, and orange colorants. The other colorant may be a pigment or a dye. Pigments and dyes may be used in combination. Examples of the pigment include those shown below.
 C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等(以上、オレンジ色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等(以上、赤色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等(以上、紫色顔料)、
 C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等(以上、青色顔料)。
C. I. Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17: 1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73, etc. (The above is orange pigment),
C. I. Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48: 2,48:3,48:4 49,49: 1,49: 2,52: 1,52: 2,53: 1,57: 1,60: 1,63: 1,66,67,81: 1,81: 2,81: 3, 83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291 294,295,296,297 etc. (above, red pigment),
C. I. Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61 etc. (above, purple pigment),
C. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15: 1,15: 2,15: 3,15: 4,15: 6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88 etc. , Blue pigment).
 また、青色着色剤として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落番号0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落番号0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Further, as the blue colorant, an aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP2012-247591A and paragraph numbers 0047 of JP2011-157478A.
 赤色着色剤として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つ臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール化合物、特許第6248838号の段落番号0016~0022に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/117965号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2012-229344号公報に記載のナフトールアゾ化合物、特許第6516119号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特許第6525101号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特開2020-090632号公報の段落番号0229に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140741号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140744号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、特開2020-079396号公報に記載のペリレン化合物などを用いることもできる。また、赤色着色剤として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子または窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 As a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, and a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Patent No. 6248838. , The diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in International Publication No. 2012/10239, the diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in International Publication No. 2012/117956, the naphthol azo compound described in JP-A-2012-229344, Patent No. 6516119. The red colorant described in Japanese Patent No. 6525101, the red colorant described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-090632, the brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraph No. 0229 of JP-A-2020-090632, Korean Publication No. 10-2019. It is also possible to use the anthraquinone compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 0147741, the anthraquinone compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-2019-0140744, the perylene compound described in JP-A-2020-079396, and the like. Further, as the red colorant, a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom bonded to the aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. You can also.
 また、他の着色剤には、国際公開第2020/174991号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。 Further, as the other colorant, the phthalocyanine compound described in International Publication No. 2020/174991 can also be used.
 染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。また、染料には、特開2012-158649号公報に記載のチアゾール化合物、特開2011-184493号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、特開2011-145540号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0028160号公報に記載されたトリアリールメタン染料ポリマー、特開2020-117638号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物も好ましく用いることができる。 There are no particular restrictions on the dye, and known dyes can be used. For example, pyrazole azo system, anilino azo system, triarylmethane system, anthraquinone system, anthrapyridone system, benzylidene system, oxonol system, pyrazolotriazole azo system, pyridone azo system, cyanine system, phenothiazine system, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine system, xanthene system, Examples thereof include phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based, indigo-based, and pyrromethene-based dyes. Further, the dyes include a thiazole compound described in JP2012-158649A, an azo compound described in JP2011-1844943, an azo compound described in JP2011-145540, and a Korean published patent No. 10. -The triarylmethane dye polymer described in JP-A-2020-0028160 and the xanthene compound described in JP-A-2020-117638 can also be preferably used.
 他の着色剤は、色素多量体であってもよい。色素多量体は、一分子中に、色素構造を2以上有するものであり、色素構造を3以上有することが好ましい。上限は、特に限定はないが、100以下とすることもできる。一分子中に有する複数の色素構造は、同一の色素構造であってもよく、異なる色素構造であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~50000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、6000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。色素多量体は、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-030742号公報、国際公開第2016/031442号等に記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 The other colorant may be a dye multimer. The dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less. The plurality of dye structures contained in one molecule may have the same dye structure or may have different dye structures. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less. Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, International Publication No. 2016/031442 and the like. Compounds can also be used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における着色剤の含有量は15質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%以上であることがより好ましく、25質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、60質量%以下が好ましく、50質量%以下がより好ましく、40質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 15% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 25% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, still more preferably 40% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7の含有量は、輝度と色分離の両立の観点から1~80質量%であることが好ましく、3~80質量%であることがより好ましく、5~80質量%であることが更に好ましく、15~65質量%であることがより一層好ましく、25~50質量%であることが特に好ましい。
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましく、5~40質量%であることがより好ましく、10~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。
C.I. in the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention. I. The content of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 1 to 80% by mass, more preferably 3 to 80% by mass, and further preferably 5 to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of achieving both brightness and color separation. It is more preferably 15 to 65% by mass, and particularly preferably 25 to 50% by mass.
In addition, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Green 7 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤中における黄色着色剤の含有量は5~85質量%であることが好ましく、15~75質量%であることがより好ましく、30~65質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中における黄色着色剤の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましく、5~40質量%であることがより好ましく、10~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 また、黄色着色剤の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して25~2000質量部であることが好ましく、25~1000質量部であることがより好ましく、25~600質量部であることが更に好ましい。上限は、450質量部以下であることがより好ましく、300質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、240質量部以下であることが更により好ましい。下限は50質量部以上であることがより好ましく、100質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。C.I.ピグメントグリーン7と黄色着色剤との割合が上記範囲であれば、より優れた保存安定性が得られやすい。
The content of the yellow colorant in the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 85% by mass, more preferably 15 to 75% by mass, and 30 to 65% by mass. Is even more preferable.
The content of the yellow colorant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and more preferably 10 to 30% by mass. More preferred.
The content of the yellow colorant is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. The upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 240 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more. C. I. When the ratio of the pigment green 7 to the yellow colorant is in the above range, more excellent storage stability can be easily obtained.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー150の含有量は0.1~85質量%であることが好ましく、10~75質量%であることがより好ましく、20~65質量%であることが更に好ましい。また、着色組成物の全固形分中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー150の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましく、5~40質量%であることがより好ましく、10~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。また、C.I.ピグメントイエロー150の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して25~2000質量部であることが好ましく、25~1000質量部であることがより好ましく、25~600質量部であることが更に好ましい。上限は450質量部以下であることがより好ましく、300質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、240質量部以下であることが更により好ましい。下限は50質量部以上であることがより好ましく、100質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。C.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントイエロー150との割合が上記範囲であれば、より優れた保存安定性が得られやすい。 C.I. in the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 150 is preferably 0.1 to 85% by mass, more preferably 10 to 75% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 65% by mass. In addition, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 150 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass. In addition, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 150 is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. The upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 240 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more. C. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When the ratio with Pigment Yellow 150 is in the above range, better storage stability can be easily obtained.
 また、黄色着色剤としてC.I.ピグメントイエロー185を用いた場合には、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー185の含有量は0.1~85質量%であることが好ましく、10~75質量%であることがより好ましく、20~65質量%であることが更に好ましい。また、着色組成物の全固形分中におけるC.I.ピグメントイエロー185の含有量は1~50質量%であることが好ましく、5~40質量%であることがより好ましく、10~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。また、C.I.ピグメントイエロー185の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して25~2000質量部であることが好ましく、25~1000質量部であることがより好ましく、25~600質量部であることが更に好ましい。上限は450質量部以下であることがより好ましく、300質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、240質量部以下であることが更により好ましい。下限は50質量部以上であることがより好ましく、100質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。C.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントイエロー185との割合が上記範囲であれば、より優れた保存安定性が得られやすい。 Also, as a yellow colorant, C.I. I. When Pigment Yellow 185 was used, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 0.1 to 85% by mass, more preferably 10 to 75% by mass, and even more preferably 20 to 65% by mass. In addition, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30% by mass. In addition, C.I. I. The content of Pigment Yellow 185 is C.I. I. It is preferably 25 to 2000 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 1000 parts by mass, and even more preferably 25 to 600 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. The upper limit is more preferably 450 parts by mass or less, further preferably 300 parts by mass or less, and even more preferably 240 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 100 parts by mass or more. C. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. When the ratio with Pigment Yellow 185 is in the above range, better storage stability can be easily obtained.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤の全量中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7と黄色着色剤との合計の含有量は、30~100質量%であることが好ましく、40~100質量%であることがより好ましく、50~100質量%であることが更に好ましく、60~100質量%であることがより一層好ましく、75~100質量%であることが更に一層好ましく、90~100質量%であることが特に好ましい。 C.I. in the total amount of the colorant contained in the coloring composition of the present invention. I. The total content of Pigment Green 7 and the yellow colorant is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass. It is even more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, even more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
 また、好ましい一態様として、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤の全量中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントイエロー150との合計の含有量は、30~100質量%であることが好ましく、40~100質量%であることがより好ましく、50~100質量%であることが更に好ましく、60~100質量%であることがより一層好ましく、75~100質量%であることが更に一層好ましく、90~100質量%であることが特に好ましい。 Further, as a preferred embodiment, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. The total content with Pigment Yellow 150 is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, further preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. %, More preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
 また、別の好ましい一態様として、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤の全量中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7とC.I.ピグメントイエロー185との合計の含有量は、30~100質量%であることが好ましく、40~100質量%であることがより好ましく、50~100質量%であることが更に好ましく、60~100質量%であることがより一層好ましく、75~100質量%であることが更に一層好ましく、90~100質量%であることが特に好ましい。 Further, as another preferable embodiment, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7 and C.I. I. The total content with Pigment Yellow 185 is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 40 to 100% by mass, further preferably 50 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass. %, More preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
 また、本発明の着色組成物が更にC.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤を含む場合、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤の全量中におけるC.I.ピグメントグリーン7と黄色着色剤とC.I.ピグメントグリーン7以外の緑色着色剤との合計の含有量は、50~100質量%であることが好ましく、75~100質量%であることがより好ましく、90~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。 Further, the coloring composition of the present invention is further described in C.I. I. When a green colorant other than Pigment Green 7 is contained, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, Yellow Colorant and C.I. I. The total content of the green colorants other than Pigment Green 7 is preferably 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably 75 to 100% by mass, and even more preferably 90 to 100% by mass. ..
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は樹脂を含む。樹脂は、例えば、顔料(C.I.ピグメントグリーン7など)を着色組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料を着色組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。分散剤としての樹脂は、顔料分散液の調製時に用いることができる。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。なお、本明細書において、環状エーテル基を有する樹脂は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物に該当する成分である。
<< Resin >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment (such as CI Pigment Green 7) in a coloring composition or for a binder. The resin mainly used to disperse the pigment in the coloring composition is also referred to as a dispersant. The resin as a dispersant can be used in the preparation of the pigment dispersion liquid. However, such an application of the resin is an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such an application. In the present specification, the resin having a cyclic ether group is a component corresponding to the compound having a cyclic ether group.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下がより好ましく、500000以下が更に好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上が更に好ましく、5000以上が更により好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 2000 to 2000000. The upper limit is more preferably 1,000,000 or less, further preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, further preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more.
 樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられる。また、特開2017-206689号公報の段落番号0041~0060に記載の樹脂、特開2018-010856号公報の段落番号0022~0071に記載の樹脂、特開2017-057265号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2017-032685号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2017-075248号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2017-066240号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載のウレア官能基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂を使用することができる。 Examples of the resin include (meth) acrylic resin, (meth) acrylamide resin, en-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, and polyarylene ether phosphine oxide. Examples thereof include resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins. Further, the resin described in paragraphs 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689, the resin described in paragraph numbers 0022-0071 of JP-A-2018-010856, the resin described in JP-A-2017-057256, and the resin. The resin described in JP-A-2017-032685, the resin described in JP-A-2017-075248, the resin described in JP-A-2017-066240, the resin described in JP-A-2020-122052, and the present invention. The resin described in JP-A-2020-11165, the resin described in JP-A-2020-139021, the alkali-soluble resin having a urea functional group described in JP-A-2020-139021, and JP-A-2017-138503. A resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain described in the publication can be used.
 本発明で用いる樹脂は、酸基を有していてもよい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。酸基を有する樹脂は、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。酸基を有する樹脂はアルカリ可溶性樹脂や、分散剤として用いることもできる。 The resin used in the present invention may have an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxy group and the like. These acid groups may be only one kind or two or more kinds. The resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group in the side chain. The resin having an acid group can also be used as an alkali-soluble resin or a dispersant.
 酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がさらに好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が最も好ましい。 The acid value of the resin having an acid group is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
 酸基を有する樹脂は、マレイミド化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
マレイミド化合物としては、N-アルキルマレイミド、N-アリールマレイミドなどが挙げられる。マレイミド化合物に由来する繰り返し単位としては、式(C-mi)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
The resin having an acid group may have a repeating unit derived from a maleimide compound.
Examples of the maleimide compound include N-alkylmaleimide and N-arylmaleimide. Examples of the repeating unit derived from the maleimide compound include a repeating unit represented by the formula (C-mi).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(C-mi)において、Rmiはアルキル基またはアリール基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は1~20が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれもよい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。Rmiはアリール基であることが好ましい。 In the formula (C-mi), Rmi represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Rmi is preferably an aryl group.
 酸基を有する樹脂は、下記式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または下記式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。 The resin having an acid group is a repeating compound derived from a compound represented by the following formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the following formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as "ether dimer"). It is also preferable that the resin contains a unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の詳細については、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。エーテルダイマーの具体例については、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In the formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. For the details of the formula (ED2), the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. For a specific example of the ether dimer, paragraph number 0317 of JP2013-209760A can be referred to, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
 エーテルダイマー由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂としては、例えば下記構造の樹脂が挙げられる。以下の構造式中Meはメチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Examples of the resin containing the repeating unit derived from the ether dimer include a resin having the following structure. In the following structural formula, Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 本発明の着色組成物は、塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことも好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有する共重合体であることがより好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と、塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが更に好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は分散剤として用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂のアミン価は、5~300mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、10mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましい。上限は、200mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin having a basic group. The resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, and has both a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group. A polymer is more preferable, and a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not containing a basic group is further preferable. A resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant. The amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH / g. The lower limit is more preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and further preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less.
 塩基性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、DISPERBYK-161、162、163、164、166、167、168、174、182、183、184、185、2000、2001、2050、2150、2163、2164、BYK-LPN6919(以上、ビックケミー社製)、ソルスパース11200、13240、13650、13940、24000、26000、28000、32000、32500、32550、32600、33000、34750、35100、35200、37500、38500、39000、53095、56000、7100(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製)、Efka PX 4300、4330、4046、4060、4080(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。また、塩基性基を有する樹脂は、特開2014-219665号公報の段落番号0063~0112に記載されたブロック共重合体(B)、特開2018-156021号公報の段落番号0046~0076に記載されたブロック共重合体A1、特開2019-184763号公報の段落番号0150~0153に記載された塩基性基を有するビニル樹脂を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available products of resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by Big Chemie), Solspers 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, Examples thereof include 56000, 7100 (above, manufactured by Japan Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (above, manufactured by BASF) and the like. Further, the resin having a basic group is described in the block copolymers (B) described in paragraphs 0063 to 0112 of JP2014-219665A and paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP-A-2018-156021. The block copolymer A1 and the vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP-A-2019-184763 can also be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とをそれぞれ含むことも好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを併用する場合、塩基性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、酸基を有する樹脂の100質量部に対して20~500質量部であることが好ましく、30~300質量部であることがより好ましく、50~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group, respectively. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved. When a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used in combination, the content of the resin having a basic group may be 20 to 500 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group. It is preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass.
 本発明で用いられる樹脂は、重合性基を有していてもよい。重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基が挙げられる。重合性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、ダイヤナールNRシリーズ(三菱レイヨン(株)製)、Photomer6173(カルボキシ基含有ポリウレタンアクリレートオリゴマー、Diamond Shamrock Co.,Ltd.製)、ビスコートR-264、KSレジスト106(いずれも大阪有機化学工業(株)製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(例えば、ACA230AA)、プラクセル CF200シリーズ(いずれも(株)ダイセル製)、Ebecryl3800(ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製)、アクリキュアーRD-F8((株)日本触媒製)、DP-1305(富士フイルムファインケミカルズ(株)製)などが挙げられる。 The resin used in the present invention may have a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. Commercially available products of resins having a polymerizable group include Dianal NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (polyurethane acrylate oligomer containing carboxy group, Diamond Shamrock Co., Ltd.), Viscort R-264, KS. Resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Praxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Co., Ltd.), Ebeclyl3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Co., Ltd.), Acrycure Examples thereof include RD-F8 (manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.) and DP-1305 (manufactured by Fujifilm Fine Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
 本発明で用いられる樹脂は、式(III)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂b1を含有することも好ましい。樹脂b1を用いることで、低温での硬化性に優れ、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成できる。更には、分光特性に優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
The resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin b1 containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III). By using the resin b1, the curability at a low temperature is excellent, and a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature. Furthermore, it is easy to form a cured film having excellent spectral characteristics.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 式中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R21およびR22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。R21およびR22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。 In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 15. The alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 2 or 3 carbon atoms. preferable. n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
 式(III)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイドまたはプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (III) include ethylene oxide of paracumylphenol or propylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 樹脂b1の全繰り返し単位中における式(III)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位の割合は、1~99モル%が好ましい。下限は、3モル%以上がより好ましく、5モル%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、95モル%以下がより好ましく、90モル%以下がさらに好ましい。 The ratio of the repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III) in all the repeating units of the resin b1 is preferably 1 to 99 mol%. The lower limit is more preferably 3 mol% or more, further preferably 5 mol% or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95 mol% or less, further preferably 90 mol% or less.
 樹脂b1は、更に、式(III)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位以外の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。例えば、樹脂b1は、(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位を含むことができ、アルキル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートのアルキル部位の炭素数は、3~10であることが好ましく、3~8であることがより好ましく、3~6であることがさらに好ましい。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートの好ましい具体例としては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。また、樹脂b1は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。 The resin b1 may further contain a repeating unit other than the repeating unit derived from the compound represented by the formula (III). For example, the resin b1 can contain repeating units derived from (meth) acrylate, and preferably contains repeating units derived from alkyl (meth) acrylate. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety of the alkyl (meth) acrylate is preferably 3 to 10, more preferably 3 to 8, and even more preferably 3 to 6. Preferred specific examples of the alkyl (meth) acrylate include n-butyl (meth) acrylate and the like. It is also preferable that the resin b1 contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
 本発明で用いられる樹脂は、ブロックイソシアネート基を含む繰り返し単位を有する樹脂(以下、樹脂BIともいう)を含有することも好ましい。この態様によれば、より優れた低温硬化性が得られ、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成できる。 The resin used in the present invention preferably contains a resin having a repeating unit containing a blocked isocyanate group (hereinafter, also referred to as resin BI). According to this aspect, more excellent low temperature curability can be obtained, and a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature.
 樹脂BIが有するブロックイソシアネート基としては、熱によりイソシアネート基を生成することが可能な基であることが好ましく、70~150℃の熱によりイソシアネート基を生成することが可能な基であることがより好ましい。ブロックイソシアネート基としては、イソシアネート基がブロック剤によって化学的に保護された構造の基が挙げられる。ブロックイソシアネート基とは、イソシアネート基がブロック剤といわれる化合物によって保護された構造を有する基であって、常温(例えば、10~30℃)ではイソシアネート基としての反応性は示さないが、加熱等によってブロックイソシアネート基からブロック剤が脱離してイソシアネート基が生成される構造の基である。 The blocked isocyanate group of the resin BI is preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat, and more preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat of 70 to 150 ° C. preferable. Examples of the blocked isocyanate group include a group having a structure in which the isocyanate group is chemically protected by a blocking agent. The blocked isocyanate group is a group having a structure in which the isocyanate group is protected by a compound called a blocking agent, and although it does not show reactivity as an isocyanate group at room temperature (for example, 10 to 30 ° C.), it is heated or the like. It is a group having a structure in which an isocyanate group is generated by desorbing a blocking agent from a blocked isocyanate group.
 樹脂BIが有するブロックイソシアネート基としては、70~150℃の熱によりイソシアネート基を生成することが可能な基であることがより好ましい。すなわち、ブロックイソシアネート基のイソシアネート生成温度(ブロック剤の脱離温度)は、70~150℃であることが好ましい。イソシアネート生成温度の下限は、保存安定性の観点から75℃以上であることが好ましく、80℃以上であることがより好ましい。イソシアネート生成温度の上限は、硬化性の観点から130℃以下であることが好ましく、120℃以下であることがより好ましい。 The blocked isocyanate group of the resin BI is more preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat at 70 to 150 ° C. That is, the isocyanate formation temperature (desorption temperature of the blocking agent) of the blocked isocyanate group is preferably 70 to 150 ° C. The lower limit of the isocyanate formation temperature is preferably 75 ° C. or higher, more preferably 80 ° C. or higher, from the viewpoint of storage stability. The upper limit of the isocyanate formation temperature is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of curability.
 ブロックイソシアネート基のイソシアネート基を保護するブロック剤としては、オキシム化合物、ラクタム化合物、フェノール化合物、アルコール化合物、アミン化合物、活性メチレン化合物、ピラゾール化合物、メルカプタン化合物、イミダゾール化合物、イミド化合物など挙げられ、保護反応、及び脱保護反応の容易性の観点からオキシム化合物、ラクタム化合物、活性メチレン化合物、ピラゾール化合物が好ましく、オキシム化合物、活性メチレン化合物、ピラゾール化合物がより好ましく、オキシム化合物が更に好ましい。 Examples of the blocking agent that protects the isocyanate group of the blocked isocyanate group include an oxime compound, a lactam compound, a phenol compound, an alcohol compound, an amine compound, an active methylene compound, a pyrazole compound, a mercaptan compound, an imidazole compound, and an imide compound. , And, from the viewpoint of easiness of deprotection reaction, an oxime compound, a lactam compound, an active methylene compound and a pyrazole compound are preferable, an oxime compound, an active methylene compound and a pyrazole compound are more preferable, and an oxime compound is further preferable.
 本発明の着色組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することができる。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上を占める樹脂が好ましく、実質的に酸基のみからなる樹脂がより好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a resin as a dispersant. Examples of the dispersant include an acidic dispersant (acidic resin) and a basic dispersant (basic resin). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups. As the acidic dispersant (acidic resin), a resin in which the amount of acid groups accounts for 70 mol% or more is preferable, and substantially, when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%. A resin consisting only of an acid group is more preferable. The acid group of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH / g. Further, the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups. As the basic dispersant (basic resin), a resin in which the amount of basic groups exceeds 50 mol% is preferable when the total amount of the amount of acid groups and the amount of basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group contained in the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
 分散剤としては、例えば、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン等が挙げられる。高分子分散剤は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。高分子分散剤は、顔料などの粒子表面に吸着し、再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、顔料などの粒子表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子を好ましい構造として挙げることができる。また、特開2011-070156号公報の段落番号0028~0124に記載の分散剤や特開2007-277514号公報に記載の分散剤も好ましく用いられる。 Examples of the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamide amines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, modified poly (meth) acrylates, (meth). Acrylic copolymer, naphthalene sulfonic acid formarin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like can be mentioned. The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer based on its structure. The polymer dispersant is adsorbed on the surface of particles such as pigments and acts to prevent reaggregation. Therefore, end-modified polymers, graft-type polymers, and block-type polymers having anchor sites on the surface of particles such as pigments can be mentioned as preferable structures. Further, the dispersant described in paragraphs 0028 to 0124 of JP-A-2011-070156 and the dispersant described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also preferably used.
 分散剤にはグラフト共重合体を用いることもできる。グラフト共重合体の詳細は、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0131~0160の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、分散剤には主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むオリゴイミン系共重合体を用いることもできる。オリゴイミン系共重合体については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0174の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、分散剤には、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂を用いることもできる。このような樹脂としては、例えばデンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。また、分散剤には、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマーなどを用いることもできる。 A graft copolymer can also be used as the dispersant. For details of the graft copolymer, the description in paragraphs 0131 to 0160 of JP2012-137564A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Further, as the dispersant, an oligoimine-based copolymer containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain can also be used. Regarding the oligoimine-based copolymer, the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0174 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and this content is incorporated in the present specification. Further, as the dispersant, a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core portion can also be used. Examples of such resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers). Specific examples of the dendrimer include the polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962. Further, as the dispersant, polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, and JP-A-2020-066678 are described. Block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, and the like can also be used.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー社製のDisperbykシリーズ(例えば、Disperbyk-111、2001など)、BYKシリーズ、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製のソルスパースシリーズ(例えば、ソルスパース20000、76500など)、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include Disperbyk series manufactured by Big Chemie (for example, Disperbyk-111, 2001, etc.), BYK series, and Sol manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. Examples include the sparse series (for example, Solsparse 20000, 76500, etc.), the Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. Ajispar series, and the like. Further, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
 樹脂の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5~50質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The resin content is preferably 5 to 50% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is more preferably 40% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 20% by mass or more. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of resin, or may contain two or more kinds of resins. When two or more kinds of resins are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<< Polymerizable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. Examples of the polymerizable compound include compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下がより好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、150以上がより好ましく、250以上が更に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer or an oligomer, but a monomer is preferable. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000. The upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 250 or more.
 重合性化合物のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価(以下、C=C価という)は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から2~14mmol/gであることが好ましい。下限は、3mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、4mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましく、5mmol/g以上であることが更により好ましい。上限は12mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、10mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましく、8mmol/g以下であることが更により好ましい。重合性化合物のC=C価は、重合性化合物の1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の数を重合性化合物の分子量で割ることで算出した値である。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing base value (hereinafter referred to as C = C value) of the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 14 mmol / g from the viewpoint of the stability over time of the coloring composition. The lower limit is more preferably 3 mmol / g or more, further preferably 4 mmol / g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 12 mmol / g or less, further preferably 10 mmol / g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol / g or less. The C = C value of the polymerizable compound is a value calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を4個以上含む化合物であることがより好ましい。この態様によれば、露光による着色組成物の硬化性が良好である。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基の上限は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から15個以下であることが好ましく、10個以下であることがより好ましく、6個以下であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましく、3~10官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが更に好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが特に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and more preferably a compound containing 4 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. According to this aspect, the curability of the coloring composition by exposure is good. The upper limit of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and further preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of stability over time of the coloring composition. The polymerizable compound is preferably a trifunctional or higher functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, and a 3 to 10 functional (meth) acrylate compound. It is more preferably present, and it is particularly preferable that it is a (meth) acrylate compound having 3 to 6 functions.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基とを含む化合物であることも好ましい。このような重合性化合物は柔軟性が高く、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基が移動し易いため、露光時において重合性化合物同士が反応し易く、支持体などとの密着性に優れた硬化膜(画素)を形成できる。また、光重合開始剤としてヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物を用いた場合においては、重合性化合物と光重合開始剤とが近接して重合性化合物の近傍でラジカルを発生させて重合性化合物をより効果的に反応させることができると推測され、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜(画素)を形成し易い。 The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group. Since such a polymerizable compound has high flexibility and the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group easily moves, the polymerizable compounds easily react with each other at the time of exposure, and a cured film having excellent adhesion to a support or the like (a cured film). Pixels) can be formed. Further, when the hydroxyalkylphenone compound is used as the photopolymerization initiator, the polymerizable compound and the photopolymerization initiator are in close proximity to each other to generate radicals in the vicinity of the polymerizable compound to make the polymerizable compound more effective. It is presumed that the reaction can be carried out, and it is easy to form a cured film (pixel) in which color mixing with other colors is further suppressed.
 重合性化合物の1分子中に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基の数は、3個以上であることが好ましく、4個以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、着色組成物の経時安定性の観点から20個以下が好ましい。 The number of alkyleneoxy groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound is preferably 3 or more, and more preferably 4 or more. The upper limit is preferably 20 or less from the viewpoint of the stability over time of the coloring composition.
 また、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基とを含む化合物のSP値(Solubility Parameter)は、着色組成物中の他の成分との相溶性の観点から9.0~11.0が好ましい。上限は、10.75以下がより好ましく、10.5以下が更に好ましい。下限は、9.25以上がより好ましく、9.5以上が更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、SP値はFedors法に基づく計算値を使用した。 The SP value (Solubility Parameter) of the compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group is preferably 9.0 to 11.0 from the viewpoint of compatibility with other components in the coloring composition. .. The upper limit is more preferably 10.75 or less, further preferably 10.5 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 9.25 or more, and further preferably 9.5 or more. In this specification, the SP value used is a calculated value based on the Fedors method.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する化合物としては、下記式(M-1)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
式(M-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式中Aは、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を表し、Lは単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Rは、アルキレン基を表し、mは1~30の整数を表し、nは3以上の整数を表し、Lはn価の連結基を表す。
Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group include a compound represented by the following formula (M-1).
Equation (M-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
In the formula, A 1 represents an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R 1 represents an alkylene group, m represents an integer of 1 to 30, and n. Represents an integer of 3 or more, and L 2 represents an n-valent linking group.
 Aが表すエチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group represented by A 1 include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
 Lが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1 include an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, and a group in which two or more of these are combined. .. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 Rが表すアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、2または3が特に好ましく、2が最も好ましい。Rが表すアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。Rが表すアルキレン基の具体例は、エチレン基、直鎖または分岐のプロピレン基などが挙げられ、エチレン基が好ましい。 The carbon number of the alkylene group represented by R 1 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, further preferably 1 to 3, particularly preferably 2 or 3, and most preferably 2. The alkylene group represented by R 1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. Specific examples of the alkylene group represented by R 1 include an ethylene group, a linear or branched propylene group, and an ethylene group is preferable.
 mは、1~30の整数を表し、1~20の整数が好ましく、1~10の整数がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましい。 M represents an integer of 1 to 30, preferably an integer of 1 to 20, more preferably an integer of 1 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 5.
 nは3以上の整数を表し、4以上の整数が好ましい。nの上限は15以下の整数が好ましく、10以下の整数がより好ましく、6以下の整数が更に好ましい。 N represents an integer of 3 or more, and an integer of 4 or more is preferable. The upper limit of n is preferably an integer of 15 or less, more preferably an integer of 10 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 6 or less.
 Lが表すn価の連結基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基およびこれらの組み合わせからなる基、ならびに、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基および複素環基から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-および-NH-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。複素環基は、非芳香族の複素環基であってもよく、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。複素環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子の種類は窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。Lが表すn価の連結基は、多官能アルコールから誘導される基であることも好ましい。 The n-valent linking group represented by L 2 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group and a group consisting of a combination thereof, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group and a complex. Examples thereof include a group consisting of a combination of at least one selected from ring groups and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO- and -NH-. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20, and even more preferably 1 to 15. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and linear or branched is preferable. The number of carbon atoms of the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and even more preferably 6 to 10. The heterocyclic group may be a non-aromatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. Examples of the heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. It is also preferable that the n-valent linking group represented by L 2 is a group derived from a polyfunctional alcohol.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する化合物としては、下記式(M-2)で表される化合物がより好ましい。
式(M-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 式中Rは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Rは、アルキレン基を表し、mは1~30の整数を表し、nは3以上の整数を表し、Lはn価の連結基を表す。式(M-2)のR、L、m、nは、式(M-1)のR、L、m、nと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
As the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group, a compound represented by the following formula (M-2) is more preferable.
Equation (M-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
In the formula, R 2 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 1 represents an alkylene group, m represents an integer of 1 to 30, n represents an integer of 3 or more, and L 2 represents an n-valent linking group. show. R 1 , L 2 , m, n in the formula (M-2) are synonymous with R 1 , L 2 , m, n in the formula (M-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 エチレン性不飽和結合含有基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD T-1420(T)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available compounds having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and an alkyleneoxy group include KAYARAD T-1420 (T) and RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330、日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320、日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310、日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA、日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E、新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460、東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックス M-402(東亞合成(株)製、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートとジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートの混合物)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることもできる。 As polymerizable compounds, dipentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-330, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-320) , Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available) KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK ester A-DPH-12E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., and these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and / or propylene glycol residues. Compounds with a bound structure (eg, SR454, SR499 commercially available from Sartmer) are preferred. As the polymerizable compound, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (commercially available M-460, manufactured by Toa Synthetic), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., NK ester A) -TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-402 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate mixture), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.), NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH- 1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), light acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be used.
 重合性化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンプロピレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシド変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートなどの3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物を用いることも好ましい。3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-309、M-310、M-321、M-350、M-360、M-313、M-315、M-306、M-305、M-303、M-452、M-450(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステル A9300、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、A-TMPT、TMPT(新中村化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD GPO-303、TMPTA、THE-330、TPA-330、PET-30(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane propylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide modified tri (meth) acrylate, and pentaerythritol. It is also preferable to use a trifunctional (meth) acrylate compound such as tri (meth) acrylate. Commercially available trifunctional (meth) acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306, and M-305. , M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) And so on.
 重合性化合物としては、酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いることで、現像時に未露光部の着色組成物が除去されやすく、現像残渣の発生を抑制できる。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基等が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸基を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-305、M-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物の好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、より好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像液に対する溶解性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having an acid group can also be used. By using a polymerizable compound having an acid group, the colored composition in the unexposed portion can be easily removed during development, and the generation of development residue can be suppressed. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferable. Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include Aronix M-305, M-510, M-520, and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.). The preferable acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, and more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. When the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the solubility in a developing solution is good, and when the acid value is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling.
 重合性化合物としては、カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used. The polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120.
 重合性化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used. Examples of commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., a (meth) acrylate monomer having a fluorene skeleton).
 重合性化合物としては、トルエンなどの環境規制物質を実質的に含まない化合物を用いることも好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain an environmentally regulatory substance such as toluene. Examples of commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-041708号公報、特開昭51-037193号公報、特公平02-032293号公報、特公平02-016765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-049860号公報、特公昭56-017654号公報、特公昭62-039417号公報、特公昭62-039418号公報に記載されたエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平01-105238号公報に記載された分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する重合性化合物を用いることも好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、UA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)などの市販品を用いることもできる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-041708, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-037193, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-0322293, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 02-016765. Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-based skeleton described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-049860, Japanese Patent Publication No. 56-017654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-039418 are also suitable. Further, it is also preferable to use a polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A No. 01-105238. The polymerizable compounds are UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, Commercially available products such as T-600, AI-600, and LINK-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
 重合性化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中5~35質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、25質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、15質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 5 to 35% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 25% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 15% by mass or more. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds. When two or more kinds of polymerizable compounds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有する。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<< Photopolymerization Initiator >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, a compound having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet region to the visible region is preferable. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、フェニルグリオキシレート化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、オキシム化合物、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物であることがより好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazoles, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, and thio compounds. , Ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, hydroxyalkylphenone compounds, aminoalkylphenone compounds, phenylglycilate compounds and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is preferably at least one selected from an oxime compound, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and more preferably an oxime compound. .. Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, the compound described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173 and JP-A-6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019 Peroxide-based Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/221177, Photopolymerization Initiator, International Publication No. 2018/110179, Photopolymerization Initiator, JP-A-2019-043864. Examples thereof include the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, and the contents thereof are described in the present invention. Incorporated in the specification.
 フェニルグリオキシレート化合物としては、フェニルグリオキシリックアシッドメチルエステルなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、Omnirad MBF(IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure MBF(BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the phenylglycilate compound include phenylglycoxylic acid methyl ester. Examples of commercially available products include Omnirad MBF (manufactured by IGM Resins BV) and Irgacure MBF (manufactured by BASF).
 アシルホスフィン化合物としては、特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィン化合物が挙げられる。具体例としては、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイドなどが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the acylphosphine compound include the acylphosphine compound described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898. Specific examples include bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) -phenylphosphine oxide and the like. Examples of commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (above, manufactured by IGM Resins BV), Irgacure 819, and Irgacure TPO (above, manufactured by BASF).
 アミノアルキルフェノン化合物としては、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアルキルフェノン化合物が挙げられる。また、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the aminoalkylphenone compound include the aminoalkylphenone compound described in JP-A No. 10-291969. Commercially available products of the aminoalkylphenone compound include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379, Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgarure 907, Irger9r , Irgacure 379EG (above, manufactured by BASF) and the like.
 ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物としては、下記式(V)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
式(V)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 式中Rvは、置換基を表し、RvおよびRvは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RvとRvとが互いに結合して環を形成していてもよく、mは0~5の整数を表す。
Examples of the hydroxyalkylphenone compound include compounds represented by the following formula (V).
Equation (V)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
In the formula, Rv 1 represents a substituent, Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. m represents an integer from 0 to 5.
 Rvが表す置換基としては、アルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルキル基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基)が挙げられる。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。Rvが表すアルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基や、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する基などが挙げられる。ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する基としては、式(V)におけるRvが結合したベンゼン環またはRvから水素原子を1個除去した構造の基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by Rv 1 include an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and an alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms). The alkyl group and the alkoxy group are preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group and alkoxy group represented by Rv 1 may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and a group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure. Examples of the group having a hydroxyalkylphenone structure include a benzene ring to which Rv 1 is bonded in the formula (V) or a group having a structure in which one hydrogen atom is removed from Rv 1 .
 RvおよびRvは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表す。置換基としては、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基)が好ましい。また、RvとRvは互いに結合して環(好ましくは炭素数4~8の環、より好ましくは、炭素数4~8の脂肪族環)を形成していてもよい。アルキル基は、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。 Rv 2 and Rv 3 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, respectively. As the substituent, an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable. Further, Rv 2 and Rv 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (preferably a ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably an aliphatic ring having 4 to 8 carbon atoms). The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
 式(V)で表される化合物の具体例としては、下記化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (V) include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available hydroxyalkylphenone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (above, IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 1173, Irgar Made) and so on.
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the oxime compound include the compound described in JP-A-2001-233842, the compound described in JP-A-2000-080068, the compound described in JP-A-2006-342166, and J. Am. C. S. The compound according to Perkin II (1979, pp. 1653-1660), J. Mol. C. S. The compound described in Perkin II (1979, pp. 156-162), the compound described in Journal of Photopolisr Science and Technology (1995, pp. 202-232), the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385, the compound described in JP-A-2000-066385. Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2017-109766, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6065596, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/152153, International Publication No. 2017. The compound described in / 051680, the compound described in JP-A-2017-198865, the compound described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of International Publication No. 2017/164127, the compound described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, etc. Can be mentioned. Specific examples of the oxime compound include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminovtan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, and the like. 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropane-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane-2-one, and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxy Examples thereof include imino-1-phenylpropane-1-one. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04 (above, manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), ADEKA PTOMER N-1919 (Co., Ltd.). Examples thereof include a photopolymerization initiator 2) manufactured by ADEKA and described in JP2012-014552A. Further, as the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and difficult to discolor. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARCLUS NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物、特許6636081号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2016-0109444号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include the compound described in JP-A-2014-137466, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and the compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. Will be.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2013/083505号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used. Specific examples of such an oxime compound include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/083505.
 光重合開始剤としては、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物は、式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
(OX-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 式(OX-1)において、ArおよびArは、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい芳香族炭化水素環を表し、Rは、フッ素原子を含む基を有するアリール基を表し、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used. The oxime compound containing a fluorine atom is preferably a compound represented by the formula (OX-1).
(OX-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
In the formula (OX-1), Ar 1 and Ar 2 each independently represent an aromatic hydrocarbon ring which may have a substituent, and R 1 is an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom. Representing R 2 and R 3 independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group, respectively.
 式(OX-1)のArおよびArが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、単環でもよく、縮合環であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素環の環を構成する炭素原子数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が特に好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環は、ベンゼン環およびナフタレン環が好ましい。なかでも、Arはベンゼン環であることが好ましい。Arがベンゼン環またはナフタレン環であることが好ましく、ナフタレン環であることがより好ましい。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 and Ar 2 in the formula (OX-1) may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and particularly preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring. Of these, Ar 1 is preferably a benzene ring. Ar 2 is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and more preferably a naphthalene ring.
 ArおよびArが有してもよい置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、ニトロ基、シアノ基、ハロゲン原子、-ORX1、-SRX1、-CORX1、-COORX1、-OCORX1、-NRX1X2、-NHCORX1、-CONRX1X2、-NHCONRX1X2、-NHCOORX1、-SOX1、-SOORX1、-NHSOX1などが挙げられる。RX1およびRX2は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。
 ハロゲン原子は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子などが挙げられ、フッ素原子が好ましい。置換基としてのアルキル基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は、水素原子の一部または全部がハロゲン原子(好ましくは、フッ素原子)で置換されていてもよい。また、アルキル基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。置換基としてのアリール基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アリール基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。また、アリール基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。置換基としてのヘテロ環基、ならびに、RX1およびRX2が表すヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。ヘテロ環基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。また、ヘテロ環基は、水素原子の一部または全部が、上記置換基で置換されていてもよい。
Substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a nitro group, a cyano group, a halogen atom, -OR X1 , -SR X1 , -COR X1 , and -COOR X1 . , -OCOR X1 , -NR X1 R X2 , -NHCOR X1 , -CONR X1 R X2 , -NHCONR X1 R X2 , -NHCOOR X1 , -SO 2 R X1 , -SO 2 OR X1 , -NHSO 2 R X1 etc. Can be mentioned. RX1 and RX2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is preferable. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group as a substituent and the alkyl group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably 1 to 30. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The alkyl group may be partially or wholly substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom). Further, the alkyl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents. The aryl group as a substituent and the aryl group represented by RX1 and RX2 preferably have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. Further, the aryl group may have a part or all of hydrogen atoms substituted with the above-mentioned substituents. The heterocyclic group as a substituent and the heterocyclic group represented by RX1 and RX2 are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 30, more preferably 3 to 18, and even more preferably 3 to 12. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. Further, in the heterocyclic group, a part or all of a hydrogen atom may be substituted with the above-mentioned substituent.
 Arが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、無置換の芳香族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。Arが表す芳香族炭化水素環は、置換基を有していることが好ましい。置換基としては、-CORX1が好ましい。RX1は、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基が好ましく、アリール基がより好ましい。アリール基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基などが挙げられる。 The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 1 is preferably an unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by Ar 2 preferably has a substituent. As the substituent, -COR X1 is preferable. RX1 is preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, more preferably an aryl group. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
 式(OX-1)のRは、フッ素原子を含む基を有するアリール基を表す。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。フッ素原子を含む基は、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基(以下、含フッ素アルキル基ともいう)、および、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基を含む基(以下、含フッ素基ともいう)であることが好ましい。含フッ素基としては、-ORF1、-SRF1、-CORF1、-COORF1、-OCORF1、-NRF1F2、-NHCORF1、-CONRF1F2、-NHCONRF1F2、-NHCOORF1、-SOF1、-SOORF1および-NHSOF1から選ばれる少なくとも1種の基が好ましい。RF1は、含フッ素アルキル基を表し、RF2は、水素原子、アルキル基、含フッ素アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。含フッ素基は、-ORF1が好ましい。 R 1 of the formula (OX-1) represents an aryl group having a group containing a fluorine atom. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The group containing a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing alkyl group) and a group containing an alkyl group having a fluorine atom (hereinafter, also referred to as a fluorine-containing group). The fluorine-containing groups include -OR F1 , -SR F1 , -COR F1 , -COOR F1 , -OCOR F1 , -NR F1 R F2 , -NHCOR F1 , -CONR F1 R F2 , -NHCONR F1 R F2 , and -NHCOOR. At least one group selected from F1 , -SO 2 R F1 , -SO 2 OR F1 and -NHSO 2 R F1 is preferred. RF1 represents a fluorine-containing alkyl group, and RF2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine-containing alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. The fluorine-containing group is preferably -OR F1 .
 RF1およびRF2が表す含フッ素アルキル基、並びにRF2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。含フッ素アルキル基およびアルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。含フッ素アルキル基において、フッ素原子の置換率は40~100%であることが好ましく、50~100%であることがより好ましく、60~100%であることがさらに好ましい。なお、フッ素原子の置換率とは、アルキル基が有する全水素原子の数に対してフッ素原子に置換されている数の比率(%)をいう。 The fluorine-containing alkyl group represented by RF1 and RF2 and the alkyl group represented by RF2 preferably have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, further preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. .. The fluorine-containing alkyl group and the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferable. In the fluorine-containing alkyl group, the substitution rate of the fluorine atom is preferably 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%, still more preferably 60 to 100%. The substitution rate of fluorine atoms means the ratio (%) of the number of substitutions to fluorine atoms to the number of total hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group.
 RF2が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。 The aryl group represented by RF2 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 RF2が表すヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。縮合数は、2~8が好ましく、2~6がより好ましく、3~5が更に好ましく、3~4が特に好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成する炭素原子の数は3~40が好ましく、3~30がより好ましく、3~20がより好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。ヘテロ環基を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましく、窒素原子がより好ましい。 The heterocyclic group represented by RF2 is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a fused ring. The number of condensations is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 6, further preferably 3 to 5, and particularly preferably 3 to 4. The number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 3 to 40, more preferably 3 to 30, and even more preferably 3 to 20. The number of heteroatoms constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and more preferably a nitrogen atom.
 フッ素原子を含む基は、式(1)または(2)で表される末端構造を有することが好ましい。式中の*は、連結手を表す。
*-CHF   (1)
*-CF   (2)
The group containing a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure represented by the formula (1) or (2). * In the formula represents a connecting hand.
* -CHF 2 (1)
* -CF 3 (2)
 式(OX-1)のRは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述したArおよびArが有してもよい置換基で説明した置換基が挙げられる。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。 R 2 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, further preferably 1 to 10, and particularly preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 式(OX-1)のRは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基およびアリール基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、上述したArおよびArが有してもよい置換基として説明した置換基が挙げられる。Rが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。Rが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。 R 3 of the formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group and the aryl group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents described above as the substituents that Ar 1 and Ar 2 may have. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 3 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 15, and even more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred. The aryl group represented by R 3 preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
 フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom are described in the compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36-40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. Compound (C-3) and the like can be mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012、0070~0079に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A and paragraphs 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466. Examples thereof include the compound described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071, ADEKA ARCULDS NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 光重合開始剤としては、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されているOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in International Publication No. 2015/036910.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。このような光重合開始剤としては国際公開第2019/088055号に記載された化合物などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxy group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used. Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the oxime compound preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 本発明では、光重合開始剤として、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A1と、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以下で、かつ、波長254nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A2と、を併用することも好ましい。この態様によれば、露光によって着色組成物を十分に硬化させやすく、低温プロセス(例えば全工程を通じて150℃以下、好ましくは120℃以下の温度下でのプロセス)にて、平坦性が良好で、かつ、耐光性や耐溶剤性などの特性にも優れた画素を形成することができる。光重合開始剤A1および光重合開始剤A2としては、上述した化合物のなかから上記の吸光係数を有する化合物を選択して用いることが好ましい。 In the present invention, as the photopolymerization initiator, the photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more in methanol and the extinction coefficient of 365 nm in methanol are 1. It is also preferable to use in combination with the photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 0 × 10 2 mL / g cm or less and a wavelength of 254 nm of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more. According to this aspect, the coloring composition is easily cured sufficiently by exposure, and the flatness is good in a low temperature process (for example, a process at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably 120 ° C. or lower throughout the whole process). Moreover, it is possible to form pixels having excellent characteristics such as light resistance and solvent resistance. As the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, it is preferable to select and use a compound having the above-mentioned extinction coefficient from the above-mentioned compounds.
 なお、本発明において、光重合開始剤の上記波長における吸光係数は、以下のようにして測定した値である。すなわち、光重合開始剤をメタノールに溶解させて測定溶液を調製し、前述の測定溶液の吸光度を測定することで算出した。具体的には、前述の測定溶液を幅1cmのガラスセルに入れ、Agilent Technologies社製UV-Vis-NIRスペクトルメーター(Cary5000)を用いて吸光度を測定し、下記式に当てはめて、波長365nmおよび波長254nmにおける吸光係数(mL/gcm)を算出した。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000016
 上記式においてεは吸光係数(mL/gcm)、Aは吸光度、cは光重合開始剤の濃度(g/mL)、lは光路長(cm)を表す。
In the present invention, the absorption coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator at the above wavelength is a value measured as follows. That is, it was calculated by dissolving the photopolymerization initiator in methanol to prepare a measurement solution and measuring the absorbance of the above-mentioned measurement solution. Specifically, the above-mentioned measurement solution was placed in a glass cell having a width of 1 cm, and the absorbance was measured using a UV-Vis-NIR spectrum meter (Cary5000) manufactured by Agilent Technologies. The absorbance coefficient (mL / gcm) at 254 nm was calculated.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000016
In the above formula, ε represents the extinction coefficient (mL / gcm), A represents the absorbance, c represents the concentration of the photopolymerization initiator (g / mL), and l represents the optical path length (cm).
 光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長365nmにおける吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であることが好ましく、1.1×10mL/gcm以上であることがより好ましく、1.2×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましく、1.3×10~5.0×10mL/gcmであることがより一層好ましく、1.5×10~3.0×10mL/gcmであることが特に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、1.5×10~9.5×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、3.0×10~8.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。
The extinction coefficient of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in methanol at a wavelength of 365 nm is 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 4 mL / g cm or more, preferably 1.1 ×. It is more preferably 10 4 mL / g cm or more, further preferably 1.2 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm, and 1.3 × 10 4 to 5.0 × 10 4 mL. It is even more preferably / gcm, and particularly preferably 1.5 × 10 4 to 3.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm.
The extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is preferably 1.0 × 10 4 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm, preferably 1.5 × 10 4 to. It is more preferably 9.5 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and even more preferably 3.0 × 10 4 to 8.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm.
 光重合開始剤A1としては、オキシム化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物が好ましく、オキシム化合物およびアシルホスフィン化合物がより好ましく、オキシム化合物が更に好ましく、組成物に含まれる他の成分との相溶性の観点からフッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物であることが特に好ましい。フッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物としては、上述した式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤A1の具体例としては、1,2-オクタンジオン,1-[4-(フェニルチオ)-,2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)](市販品としては、例えば、Irgacure OXE01、BASF社製)、エタノン,1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(市販品としては、例えば、Irgacure OXE02、BASF社製)、上記のオキシム化合物の具体例で示した(C-13)、(C-14)、(C-17)などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator A1, an oxime compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound, and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, an oxime compound and an acylphosphine compound are more preferable, an oxime compound is further preferable, and compatibility with other components contained in the composition. From the viewpoint of the above, it is particularly preferable that the oxime compound contains a fluorine atom. As the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom, the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (OX-1) is preferable. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator A1 include 1,2-octanedione, 1- [4- (phenylthio)-, 2- (O-benzoyloxime)] (commercially available products include, for example, Irgure OXE01, BASF). , Etanon, 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 1- (O-acetyloxime) (commercially available products include, for example, Irgacure OXE02, BASF), (C-13), (C-14), (C-17) and the like shown in the above-mentioned specific examples of the oxime compound can be mentioned.
 光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以下であり、10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、20~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。また、光重合開始剤A1のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数と、光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長365nmの光の吸光係数との差は、9.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であることが好ましく、5.0×10~3.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましく、1.0×10~2.0×10mL/gcmであることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤A2のメタノール中での波長254nmの光の吸光係数は、1.0×10mL/gcm以上であり、1.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることが好ましく、5.0×10~1.0×10mL/gcmであることがより好ましい。 The extinction coefficient of the light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm or less, preferably 10 to 1.0 × 10 2 mL / gcm, 20 More preferably, it is ~ 1.0 × 10 2 mL / g cm. The difference between the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 9.0 × 10 2 mL. It is / gcm or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more, more preferably 5.0 × 10 3 to 3.0 × 10 4 mL / gcm, and more preferably 1.0 × 10 It is more preferably 4 to 2.0 × 10 4 mL / g cm. The extinction coefficient of light having a wavelength of 254 nm in methanol of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 1.0 × 10 3 mL / gcm or more, and 1.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 6 mL / gcm. It is preferably 5.0 × 10 3 to 1.0 × 10 5 mL / g cm.
 光重合開始剤A2としては、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物、フェニルグリオキシレート化合物、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物が好ましく、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物およびフェニルグリオキシレート化合物がより好ましく、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物が更に好ましい。また、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物としては、上述した式(V)で表される化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤A2の具体例としては、1-ヒドロキシ-シクロヘキシル-フェニル-ケトン、1-[4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)-フェニル]-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-プロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。光重合開始剤A2の市販品としては、Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物)などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator A2, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound, a phenylglioxylate compound, an aminoalkylphenone compound and an acylphosphine compound are preferable, a hydroxyalkylphenone compound and a phenylglycilate compound are more preferable, and a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is further preferable. preferable. Further, as the hydroxyalkylphenone compound, the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is preferable. Specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator A2 include 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone and 1- [4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) -phenyl] -2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propane-1-. On etc. can be mentioned. Examples of commercially available products of the photopolymerization initiator A2 include Omnirad 2959 (hydroxyalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins BV).
 光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2との組み合わせとしては、光重合開始剤A1がオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2がヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物である組み合わせが好ましく、光重合開始剤A1がオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2が上述した式(V)で表される化合物である組み合わせがより好ましく、光重合開始剤A1がフッ素原子を含むオキシム化合物であり、光重合開始剤A2が上述した式(V)で表される化合物である組み合わせが特に好ましい。 As a combination of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2, a combination in which the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a hydroxyalkylphenone compound is preferable, and the photopolymerization initiator A1 is A combination of an oxime compound in which the photopolymerization initiator A2 is a compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (V) is more preferable, the photopolymerization initiator A1 is an oxime compound containing a fluorine atom, and the photopolymerization initiator A2 is A combination of the compounds represented by the above formula (V) is particularly preferable.
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中3~25質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、8質量%以上であることが更により好ましく、9質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、17.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。光重合開始剤は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合には、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less. The photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
 また、本発明の着色組成物において、質量%基準で、着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量Mと、着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量Iとの比(M/I)は、20以下であることが好ましい。上記比の上限は、10以下であることがより好ましく、5以下であることが更に好ましく、3以下であることが更により好ましく、2以下であることが特に好ましい。上記比の下限は、0.1以上であることが好ましく、0.5以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content M of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition and the content I of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition on a mass% basis. The ratio (M / I) with and to is preferably 20 or less. The upper limit of the above ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less. The lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述したオキシム化合物を用いた場合、オキシム化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中3~25質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、8質量%以上であることが更により好ましく、9質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、17.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。オキシム化合物の含有量が上記範囲にあることにより、現像後の硬化膜の支持体への密着性を向上できる。オキシム化合物は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合には、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the above-mentioned oxime compound is used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the oxime compound is preferably 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less. When the content of the oxime compound is in the above range, the adhesion of the cured film after development to the support can be improved. The oxime compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
 また、本発明の着色組成物において、質量%基準で、着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量Mと、着色組成物の全固形分中におけるオキシム化合物の含有量Iとの比(M/I)は、20以下であることが好ましい。上記比の上限は、10以下であることがより好ましく、5以下であることが更に好ましく、3以下であることが更により好ましく、2以下であることが特に好ましい。上記比の下限は、0.1以上であることが好ましく、0.5以上であることがより好ましい。 Further, in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content M of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition and the content IO of the oxime compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition on a mass% basis. The ratio (M / IO ) of is preferably 20 or less. The upper limit of the ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less. The lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1を用いた場合、光重合開始剤A1の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中3~25質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、8質量%以上であることが更により好ましく、9質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、17.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。光重合開始剤A1の含有量が上記範囲にあることにより、現像後の硬化膜の支持体への密着性を向上できる。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 is used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is 3 to 25% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is preferable. The lower limit is more preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, further preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 9% by mass or more. It is particularly preferable that it is 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less. When the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 is in the above range, the adhesion of the cured film after development to the support can be improved.
 本発明の着色組成物において、質量%基準で、着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量Mと、着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤A1の含有量IA1との比(M/IA1)は、20以下であることが好ましい。上記比の上限は、10以下であることがより好ましく、5以下であることが更に好ましく、3以下であることが更により好ましく、2以下であることが特に好ましい。上記比の下限は、0.1以上であることが好ましく、0.5以上であることがより好ましい。 In the coloring composition of the present invention, the content M of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition and the content of the photopolymerization initiator A1 in the total solid content of the coloring composition I A1 on a mass% basis. The ratio with and (M / I A1 ) is preferably 20 or less. The upper limit of the ratio is more preferably 10 or less, further preferably 5 or less, further preferably 3 or less, and particularly preferably 2 or less. The lower limit of the ratio is preferably 0.1 or more, and more preferably 0.5 or more.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A2を用いた場合、光重合開始剤A2の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~10.0質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、1.5質量%以上であることが更により好ましい。上限は、9.0質量%以下であることがより好ましく、8.0質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、7.0質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。光重合開始剤A2の含有量が上記範囲であれば、現像後の硬化膜の耐溶剤性を向上できる。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A2 is used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is 0.1 to 10.0 in the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably by mass%. The lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, further preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 9.0% by mass or less, further preferably 8.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 7.0% by mass or less. When the content of the photopolymerization initiator A2 is in the above range, the solvent resistance of the cured film after development can be improved.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2とを用いた場合、本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤A1の100質量部に対して、光重合開始剤A2を50~200質量部含有することが好ましい。上限は、175質量部以下であることがより好ましく、150質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、60質量部以上であることがより好ましく、70質量部以上であることが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、低温プロセス(例えば全工程を通じて150℃以下、好ましくは120℃以下の温度下でのプロセス)にて耐溶剤性などの特性に優れた硬化膜を形成することができる。光重合開始剤A1および光重合開始剤A2をそれぞれ2種以上併用する場合には、それぞれの合計量が上記要件を満たすことが好ましい。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 and photopolymerization initiator A2 are used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the coloring composition of the present invention comprises 100 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A1. On the other hand, it is preferable to contain 50 to 200 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator A2. The upper limit is more preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 60 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 70 parts by mass or more. According to this aspect, a cured film having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be formed in a low temperature process (for example, a process at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, preferably 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process). When two or more kinds of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2 are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount of each of them satisfies the above requirements.
 本発明の着色組成物において、光重合開始剤として上述した光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2とを用いた場合、着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2との合計の含有量は、3.1~25質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、4質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更により好ましく、8質量%以上であることが一層好ましく、9質量%以上であることがより一層好ましく、10質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、17.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。 When the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator A1 and photopolymerization initiator A2 are used as the photopolymerization initiator in the coloring composition of the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition are used. The total content with the agent A2 is preferably 3.1 to 25% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 4% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more, further preferably 7.5% by mass or more, still more preferably 8% by mass or more. It is even more preferably 9% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 17.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤として光重合開始剤A1および光重合開始剤A2以外の光重合開始剤(以下、他の光重合開始剤ともいう)を含有することもできるが、他の光重合開始剤は実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。他の光重合開始剤を実質的に含有しない場合とは、他の光重合開始剤の含有量が、光重合開始剤A1と光重合開始剤A2との合計100質量部に対して1質量部以下であることを意味し、0.5質量部以下であることがより好ましく、0.1質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、他の光重合開始剤を含有しないことが一層好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a photopolymerization initiator other than the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2 (hereinafter, also referred to as other photopolymerization initiators) as the photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable that the other photopolymerization initiator is substantially not contained. When the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is substantially not contained, the content of the other photopolymerization initiator is 1 part by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total of the photopolymerization initiator A1 and the photopolymerization initiator A2. It means that it is the following, more preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, further preferably 0.1 part by mass or less, and further preferably not containing another photopolymerization initiator.
<<環状エーテル基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含む。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基が挙げられ、エポキシ基が好ましい。エポキシ基は、脂環式エポキシ基であってもよい。なお、脂環式エポキシ基とは、エポキシ環と飽和炭化水素環とが縮合した環状構造を有する1価の官能基のことを意味する。
<< Compound with cyclic ether group >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a compound having a cyclic ether group. Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable. The epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group. The alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
 環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基、式(e-2)で表される基、式(e-3)で表される基および式(e-4)で表される基から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、式(e-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。式(e-1)のnが0である場合は、式(e-1)で表される基はエポキシ基であり、nが1である場合は、式(e-1)で表される基はオキセタニル基である。また、式(e-2)で表される基、式(e-3)で表される基および式(e-4)で表される基は脂環式エポキシ基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(e-1)中、RE1は水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、nは0または1を表し、*は結合手を表す;
 式(e-2)中、環AE1は単環の脂肪族炭化水素環を表し、*は結合手を表す;
 式(e-3)および式(e-4)中、*は結合手を表す。
The cyclic ether group is represented by a group represented by the formula (e-1), a group represented by the formula (e-2), a group represented by the formula (e-3) and a group represented by the formula (e-4). It is preferably at least one selected from the groups, and more preferably the group represented by the formula (e-1). When n in the formula (e-1) is 0, the group represented by the formula (e-1) is an epoxy group, and when n is 1, it is represented by the formula (e-1). The group is an oxetanyl group. Further, the group represented by the formula (e-2), the group represented by the formula (e-3) and the group represented by the formula (e-4) are alicyclic epoxy groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
In formula (e-1), RE1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, n represents 0 or 1, and * represents a bond;
In formula (e-2), ring A E1 represents a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and * represents a bond;
In equations (e-3) and (e-4), * represents a bond.
 RE1が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~10がより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。RE1が表すアルキル基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 10, further preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group represented by RE1 is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
 nが0のとき、RE1は水素原子であることが好ましい。nが1のとき、RE1は水素原子または炭素数1~3のアルキル基であることが好ましい。 When n is 0, it is preferable that RE1 is a hydrogen atom. When n is 1, it is preferable that RE1 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 ここで、式(e-1)のnが0のとき、式(e-1)は以下の式(e-1a)で表される基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Here, when n in the formula (e-1) is 0, the formula (e-1) is a group represented by the following formula (e-1a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式(e-2)の環AE1が表す単環の脂肪族炭化水素環としては、5~7員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることが更に好ましい。具体例としては、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環が挙げられ、シクロペンタン環またはシクロヘキサン環であることが好ましく、シクロヘキサン環であることがより好ましい。式(e-2)で表される基の具体例としては、以下に示す基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
The monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon ring represented by the ring AE1 of the formula (e-2) is preferably a 5- to 7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered aliphatic ring. It is more preferably a hydrocarbon ring, and even more preferably a 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Specific examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring, and more preferably a cyclohexane ring. Specific examples of the group represented by the formula (e-2) include the groups shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、エポキシ基を有する化合物とオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを併用することも好ましい。この態様によれば、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、混色の発生をより効果的に抑制できる。エポキシ基を有する化合物とオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを併用する場合には、エポキシ基を有する化合物とオキセタニル基を有する化合物との質量比は、エポキシ基を有する化合物の100質量部に対してオキセタニル基を有する化合物が10~300質量部であることが好ましく、20~200質量部であることがより好ましく、50~150質量部であることが更に好ましい。 As the compound having a cyclic ether group, it is also preferable to use a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group in combination. According to this aspect, a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the occurrence of color mixing can be suppressed more effectively. When a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group are used in combination, the mass ratio of the compound having an epoxy group to the compound having an oxetanyl group is 100 parts by mass of the compound having an epoxy group. The amount of the compound containing the above is preferably 10 to 300 parts by mass, more preferably 20 to 200 parts by mass, still more preferably 50 to 150 parts by mass.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、モノマーでもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)であってもよい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物がモノマーの場合、その分子量は1500未満であることが好ましく、100~1250であることがより好ましく、300~1000であることが更に好ましい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物が高分子化合物の場合、その重量平均分子量は1500以上であることが好ましく、1750以上であることがより好ましく、2000以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、30000以下であることが好ましく、20000以下であることがより好ましく、10000以下であることが更に好ましい。 The compound having a cyclic ether group may be a monomer or a polymer compound. When the compound having a cyclic ether group is a monomer, its molecular weight is preferably less than 1500, more preferably 100 to 1250, and even more preferably 300 to 1000. When the compound having a cyclic ether group is a polymer compound, its weight average molecular weight is preferably 1500 or more, more preferably 1750 or more, still more preferably 2000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 20,000 or less, and even more preferably 10,000 or less.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物を用いることが好ましい。この態様によれば、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、混色の発生をより効果的に抑制できる。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物と、分子量1500未満の化合物とを併用することも好ましい。重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物と、分子量1500未満の化合物との質量比は、重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物の100質量部に対して、分子量1500未満の化合物が5~200質量部であることが好ましく、10~100質量部であることがより好ましく、25~75質量部であることが更に好ましい。 As the compound having a cyclic ether group, it is preferable to use a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more. According to this aspect, a sufficiently cured cured film can be formed even by heating at a relatively low temperature, and the occurrence of color mixing can be suppressed more effectively. Further, as the compound having a cyclic ether group, it is also preferable to use a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more and a compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 in combination. The mass ratio of the compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more to the compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 is 5 to 200 parts by mass for the compound having a molecular weight of less than 1500 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more. It is preferably 10 to 100 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 75 parts by mass.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の環状エーテル基の含有量は、2.0~6.5mmol/gであることが好ましく、2.5~6.3mmol/gであることがより好ましく、3.0~6.0mmol/gであることが更に好ましい。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物が分子量1500未満の化合物の場合、環状エーテル基の含有量は、2.0~7.0mmol/gであることが好ましく、3.0~6.5mmol/gであることがより好ましく、3.5~6.0mmol/gであることが更に好ましい。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物が重量分子量1500以上の化合物の場合、環状エーテル基の含有量は、2.5~6.5mmol/gであることが好ましく、3.0~6.3mmol/gであることがより好ましく、3.5~6.0mmol/gであることが更に好ましい。なお、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の環状エーテル基の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物に含まれる環状エーテル基の数を、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の分子量で割ることで算出した値である。 The content of the cyclic ether group of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 2.0 to 6.5 mmol / g, more preferably 2.5 to 6.3 mmol / g, and 3.0 to 6.3 to 6.3 mmol / g. It is more preferably 6.0 mmol / g. When the compound having a cyclic ether group has a molecular weight of less than 1500, the content of the cyclic ether group is preferably 2.0 to 7.0 mmol / g, preferably 3.0 to 6.5 mmol / g. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 3.5 to 6.0 mmol / g. When the compound having a cyclic ether group is a compound having a weight molecular weight of 1500 or more, the content of the cyclic ether group is preferably 2.5 to 6.5 mmol / g, preferably 3.0 to 6.3 mmol / g. Is more preferable, and 3.5 to 6.0 mmol / g is further preferable. The content of the cyclic ether group of the compound having a cyclic ether group is a value calculated by dividing the number of cyclic ether groups contained in the compound having a cyclic ether group by the molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group. ..
 本発明の着色組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物として、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位を含む化合物を用いることが好ましい。環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
In the coloring composition of the present invention, it is preferable to use a compound containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group as the compound having a cyclic ether group. Examples of the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group include a repeating unit represented by the formula (A1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 式(A1)において、Xa1は3価の連結基を表し、La1は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Za1は環状エーテル基を表す。 In formula (A1), X a1 represents a trivalent linking group, La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z a1 represents a cyclic ether group.
 式(A1)のXa1が表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基およびノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリエーテル系連結基、ノボラック系連結基およびポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましく、ポリエーテル系連結基およびポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基が更に好ましく、ポリエーテル系連結基が特に好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by Xa1 of the formula (A1) includes a poly (meth) acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, a polyester-based linking group, a polyurethane-based linking group, a polyurea-based linking group, and a polyamide-based linking group. Examples include linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polystyrene-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups, novolak-based linking groups, poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, and bisphenol-based linking groups. The linking group and the novolak-based linking group are preferable, the polyether-based linking group, the novolak-based linking group and the poly (meth) acrylic-based linking group are more preferable, and the polyether-based linking group and the poly (meth) acrylic-based linking group are further preferable. , Polyester-based linking groups are particularly preferred.
 式(A1)のLa1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by La1 of the formula ( A1 ) includes an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and -NH-. , -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S- and groups consisting of a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
 式(A1)のZa1が表す環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基が挙げられ、エポキシ基であることが好ましい。また、Za1が表す環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基、または、式(e-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(e-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 of the formula (A1) include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable. Further, the cyclic ether group represented by Z a1 is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) or a group represented by the formula (e-2), and is represented by the formula (e-1). It is more preferable that it is a group to be used.
 環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位、ノボラック構造の繰り返し単位、または、(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位であることが好ましく、ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位、または、(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位であることがより好ましく、ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位であることが更に好ましい。 The repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure, a repeating unit having a novolak structure, or a repeating unit having a (meth) acrylic structure, and a repeating unit having a polyether structure or a (meth) structure. It is more preferably a repeating unit having an acrylic structure, and even more preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure.
 また、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、主鎖構造中に脂肪族炭化水素環を含むことが好ましい。主鎖構造中に含まれる脂肪族炭化水素環は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。この態様によれば、主鎖の疎水性により、環状エーテル基を有する化合物が顔料近傍に存在しやすくなり、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成しやすい。また、主鎖構造中に含まれる脂肪族炭化水素環は、単環、縮合環および架橋環のいずれでもよいが、単環であることが好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素環の具体例としては、シクロヘキサン環、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘプタン環などが挙げられ、シクロヘキサン環であることが好ましい。 Further, the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group preferably contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring in the main chain structure. The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring contained in the main chain structure is preferably a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. According to this aspect, the hydrophobicity of the main chain makes it easy for a compound having a cyclic ether group to be present in the vicinity of the pigment, and it is easy to form a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed. The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring contained in the main chain structure may be a monocyclic ring, a condensed ring or a crosslinked ring, but is preferably a monocyclic ring. Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cycloheptane ring, and the like, and a cyclohexane ring is preferable.
 環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、脂肪族炭化水素環を含むポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素環を含むポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位としては、式(A2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
The repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is preferably a repeating unit having a polyether structure containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure containing the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include the repeating unit represented by the formula (A2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式(A2)中、Xa2は3価の脂肪族炭化水素環基を表し、La2は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Za2は環状エーテル基を表す。 In formula (A2), X a2 represents a trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z a 2 represents a cyclic ether group.
 Xa2が表す3価の脂肪族炭化水素環基としては、シクロヘキサン環基、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘプタン環が挙げられ、シクロヘキサン環基であることが好ましい。 Examples of the trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group represented by Xa2 include a cyclohexane ring group, a cyclopentane ring, and a cycloheptane ring, and a cyclohexane ring group is preferable.
 La2が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。
 La2は、単結合であることが好ましい。
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by La2 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, and -SO-. Examples thereof include -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO-, -OCO-, -S-, and a group consisting of a combination of two or more of these. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
La2 is preferably a single bond.
 Za2が表す環状エーテル基は、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基が挙げられ、エポキシ基であることが好ましい。また、Za2が表す環状エーテル基は、式(e-1)で表される基、または、式(e-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(e-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the cyclic ether group represented by Z a2 include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group, and an epoxy group is preferable. Further, the cyclic ether group represented by Z a2 is preferably a group represented by the formula (e-1) or a group represented by the formula (e-2), and is represented by the formula (e-1). It is more preferable that it is a group to be used.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位の他に他の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、酸基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-1ともいう)、酸基が保護基で保護された基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-2ともいう)、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位(以下、繰り返し単位B-3)などが挙げられる。 The compound having a cyclic ether group may have another repeating unit in addition to the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group. Other repeating units include a repeating unit having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit B-1) and a repeating unit having a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group (hereinafter, also referred to as a repeating unit B-2). , Repeating unit having a polymerizable group (hereinafter, repeating unit B-3) and the like.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-1を有する場合には、比較的低温での加熱でも十分に硬化した硬化膜を形成でき、他色との混色がより抑制された硬化膜を形成することができる。さらには、着色組成物を用いてパターン状に露光した際に、未露光部を現像液で現像除去させやすく、現像性にも優れており、未露光部の残渣の発生をより抑制できる。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-2を含む場合には、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。 When the compound having a cyclic ether group has the repeating unit B-1, a cured film that is sufficiently cured even by heating at a relatively low temperature can be formed, and a cured film in which color mixing with other colors is more suppressed is formed. be able to. Further, when the unexposed portion is exposed in a pattern using the coloring composition, the unexposed portion can be easily developed and removed with a developing solution, the developability is excellent, and the generation of the residue in the unexposed portion can be further suppressed. Further, when the compound having a cyclic ether group contains the repeating unit B-2, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved.
 上記繰り返し単位B-1が有する酸基、および、上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記保護基で保護されている酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the acid group contained in the repeating unit B-1 and the acid group protected by the protecting group in the repeating unit B-2 include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group. , A phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 上記繰り返し単位B-2における上記酸基を保護する保護基としては、酸または塩基の作用により分解して脱離する基が挙げられる。保護基は、式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、脱保護しやすいという理由から式(Y3)または式(Y5)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the protecting group that protects the acid group in the repeating unit B-2 include a group that decomposes and is eliminated by the action of an acid or a base. The protecting group is preferably a group represented by any of the formulas (Y1) to (Y5), and is a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5) because it is easy to deprotect. Is more preferable.
 式(Y1):-C(RY1)(RY2)(RY3
 式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(RY4)(RY5)(RY6
 式(Y3):-C(RY7)(RY8)(ORY9
 式(Y4):-C(RY10)(H)(ArY1
 式(Y5):-C(=O)(RY11
Equation ( Y1 ): -C (RY1) ( RY2 ) ( RY3 )
Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC ( RY4 ) ( RY5 ) ( RY6 )
Equation (Y3): -C ( RY7 ) ( RY8 ) (OR Y9 )
Equation (Y4): -C ( RY10 ) (H) (Ar Y1 )
Equation (Y5): -C (= O) ( RY11 )
 式(Y1)中、RY1~RY3は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY1~RY3のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y2)中、RY4~RY6は、各々独立にアルキル基を表し、RY4~RY6のうちの2つが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す;
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
In formula ( Y1 ), RY1 to RY3 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY1 to RY3 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y2), RY4 to RY6 each independently represent an alkyl group, and two of RY4 to RY6 may be bonded to form a ring;
In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. Representing a group or aryl group, RY7 or RY8 and RY9 may be combined to form a ring;
In formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group and RY10 represents an alkyl or aryl group;
In formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl or aryl group.
 式(Y1)のRY1~RY3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y1)において、RY1~RY3の2つが結合して、環を形成してもよい。RY1~RY3の2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロペンチル基やシクロヘキシル基などの単環のシクロアルキル基、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基などの多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられ、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基であることが好ましい。また、上記のシクロアルキル基においては、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又は、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY1 to RY3 in the formula ( Y1 ) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. In the formula ( Y1 ), two of RY1 to RY3 may be combined to form a ring. The ring formed by combining the two of RY1 to RY3 includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl. Examples thereof include a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable. Further, in the above cycloalkyl group, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
 式(Y2)のRY4~RY6が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖状または分岐状であることが好ましい。式(Y2)のRY4~RY6のうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。式(Y2)において、RY4~RY6の2つが結合して、環を形成していてもよい。形成される環としては、式(Y1)で説明した環が挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by RY4 to RY6 in the formula (Y2) is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched. It is preferable that at least two of RY4 to RY6 of the formula (Y2) are methyl groups. In the formula (Y2), two of RY4 to RY6 may be combined to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed include the ring described by the formula (Y1).
 式(Y3)中、RY7およびRY8は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7およびRY8の少なくとも一方がアルキル基またはアリール基であり、RY9は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成してもよい。
アルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して形成される環としては、テトラヒドロフラニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基等が挙げられる。式(Y3)において、RY7またはRY8と、RY9とが結合して環を形成していることが好ましい。また、RY7およびRY8の一方は水素原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (Y3), RY7 and RY8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of RY7 and RY8 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and RY9 is an alkyl. It represents a group or an aryl group, and RY7 or RY8 may be bonded to RY9 to form a ring.
The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples of the ring formed by binding RY7 or RY8 and RY9 include a tetrahydrofuranyl group and a tetrahydropyranyl group. In the formula (Y3), it is preferable that RY7 or RY8 and RY9 are combined to form a ring. Further, it is preferable that one of RY7 and RY8 is a hydrogen atom.
 式(Y4)中、ArY1は、アリール基を表し、RY10は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、ArY1とRY10とは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。式(Y4)においてRY10は、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 In the formula (Y4), Ar Y1 represents an aryl group, RY10 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and Ar Y1 and RY10 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. In formula (Y4), RY10 is preferably an alkyl group.
 式(Y5)中、RY11は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は1~12であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましく、1~4であることがさらに好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。 In the formula (Y5), RY11 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The aryl group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
 保護基の分子量は40~200であることが好ましく、40~150であることがより好ましく、40~120であることが更に好ましい。保護基の分子量が上記範囲であれば保存安定性に優れ、かつ、低温での硬化性に優れた着色組成物とすることができる。 The molecular weight of the protecting group is preferably 40 to 200, more preferably 40 to 150, and even more preferably 40 to 120. When the molecular weight of the protecting group is within the above range, a coloring composition having excellent storage stability and excellent curability at a low temperature can be obtained.
 保護基の具体例としては、1-メトキシエチル基、1-エトキシエチル基、1-n-プロポキシエチル基、1-n-ブトキシエチル基、1-t-ブトキシエチル基、1-シクロペンチルオキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、シクロヘキシル(メトキシ)メチル基、α-メトキシベンジル基、α-エトキシベンジル基、α-n-プロポキシベンジル基、2-フェニル-1-メトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-エトキシエチル基、2-フェニル-1-i-プロポキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が挙げられ、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基、2-テトラヒドロフラニル基、2-テトラヒドロピラニル基が好ましく、1-エトキシエチル基、1-シクロヘキシルオキシエチル基がより好ましい。 Specific examples of the protective group include 1-methoxyethyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-n-propoxyethyl group, 1-n-butoxyethyl group, 1-t-butoxyethyl group and 1-cyclopentyloxyethyl group. , 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, cyclohexyl (methoxy) methyl group, α-methoxybenzyl group, α-ethoxybenzyl group, α-n-propoxybenzyl group, 2-phenyl-1-methoxyethyl group, 2-phenyl-1 -Ethyl group, 2-phenyl-1-i-propoxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl group, 2-tetrahydropyranyl group, 1-ethoxyethyl group, 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuranyl A group and a 2-tetrahydropyranyl group are preferable, and a 1-ethoxyethyl group and a 1-cyclohexyloxyethyl group are more preferable.
 繰り返し単位B-3が有する重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基が挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable group of the repeating unit B-3 include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
 繰り返し単位B-1としては、下記式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、繰り返し単位B-2としては、下記式(B2)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。また、繰り返し単位B-3としては、下記式(B3)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Examples of the repeating unit B-1 include a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B1). Further, as the repeating unit B-2, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B2) can be mentioned. Further, as the repeating unit B-3, a repeating unit represented by the following formula (B3) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(B1)において、Xb1は3価の連結基を表し、Lb1は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb1は酸基を表す。
 式(B2)において、Xb2は3価の連結基を表し、Lb2は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb2は酸基が保護基で保護された基を表す
 式(B3)において、Xb3は3価の連結基を表し、Lb3は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、Zb3は重合性基を表す。
In formula (B1), X b1 represents a trivalent linking group, L b1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b1 represents an acid group.
In formula (B2), X b2 represents a trivalent linking group, L b2 represents a single-bonded or divalent linking group, and Z b2 represents a group in which the acid group is protected by a protective group (B3). In, X b3 represents a trivalent linking group, L b3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Z b3 represents a polymerizable group.
 式(B1)のXb1が表す3価の連結基、式(B2)のXb2が表す3価の連結基および式(B3)のXb3が表す3価の連結基としては、特に限定はない。例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基、ノボラック系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ビスフェノール系連結基およびノボラック系連結基が好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基がより好ましい。 The trivalent linking group represented by X b1 of the formula (B1), the trivalent linking group represented by X b2 of the formula (B2), and the trivalent linking group represented by X b3 of the formula (B3) are not particularly limited. do not have. For example, poly (meth) acrylic linking group, polyalkyleneimine-based linking group, polyester-based linking group, polyurethane-based linking group, polyurea-based linking group, polyamide-based linking group, polyether-based linking group, polystyrene-based linking group, bisphenol. Examples thereof include a system-based linking group and a novolak-based linking group, and poly (meth) acrylic-based linking groups, polyether-based linking groups, polyester-based linking groups, bisphenol-based linking groups and novolac-based linking groups are preferable, and poly (meth) acrylic is preferable. System linking groups are more preferred.
 式(B1)のLb1が表す2価の連結基、式(B2)のLb2が表す2価の連結基および式(B3)のLb3が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐状、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖状または分岐状が好ましい。また、アルキレン基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L b1 of the formula (B1), the divalent linking group represented by L b2 of the formula (B2), and the divalent linking group represented by L b3 of the formula (B3) include an alkylene group (as a divalent linking group). An alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2- , -CO-, -O-, -COO. -, -OCO-, -S- and groups consisting of a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned. The alkylene group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched. Further, the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and an alkoxy group.
 式(B1)のZb1が表す酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the acid group represented by Z b1 of the formula (B1) include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and the acid group is a carboxy group. Is more preferable.
 式(B2)のZb2が表す酸基が保護基で保護された基としては、酸基が上述した式(Y1)~(Y5)のいずれかで表される基で保護された基が挙げられる、酸基が式(Y3)または式(Y5)で表される基で保護された基であることが好ましい。上記酸基としては、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基またはカルボキシ基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the group in which the acid group represented by Z b2 of the formula (B2) is protected by a protecting group include a group in which the acid group is protected by a group represented by any of the above-mentioned formulas (Y1) to (Y5). It is preferable that the acid group is a group protected by a group represented by the formula (Y3) or the formula (Y5). Examples of the acid group include a phenolic hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group and a phosphoric acid group, and a phenolic hydroxy group or a carboxy group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 式(B3)のZb3が表す重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基が挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable group represented by Z b3 of the formula (B3) include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-1を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する化合物中における単位B-1の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の全繰り返し単位中5~85モル%であることが好ましい。上限は60モル%以下であることがより好ましく、40モル%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、8モル%以上がより好ましく、10モル%以上が更に好ましい。 When the compound having a cyclic ether group contains the repeating unit B-1, the content of the unit B-1 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 5 to 85 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have. The upper limit is more preferably 60 mol% or less, further preferably 40 mol% or less. The lower limit is more preferably 8 mol% or more, further preferably 10 mol% or more.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-2を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する化合物中における単位B-2の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることがより好ましく、30モル%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上がより好ましく、3モル%以上が更に好ましい。 When the compound having a cyclic ether group contains the repeating unit B-2, the content of the unit B-2 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have. The upper limit is more preferably 45 mol% or less, further preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 mol% or more, further preferably 3 mol% or more.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-1と繰り返し単位B-2とをそれぞれを含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、繰り返し単位B-1の1モルに対して繰り返し単位B-2を0.4~3.2モル含むことが好ましく、0.8~2.8モル含むことがより好ましく、1.2~2.4モル含むことが更に好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性、現像性、得られる硬化膜の混色の抑制をより高い水準で並立させることができる。 When the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a repeating unit B-1 and a repeating unit B-2, respectively, the compound having a cyclic ether group has a repeating unit B-2 for 1 mol of the repeating unit B-1. It preferably contains 0.4 to 3.2 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 2.8 mol, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.4 mol. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition, the developability, and the suppression of the color mixing of the obtained cured film can be made parallel at a higher level.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物が繰り返し単位B-3を含む場合、環状エーテル基を有する化合物中における単位B-3の含有量は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の全繰り返し単位中1~65モル%であることが好ましい。上限は45モル%以下であることがより好ましく、30モル%以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、2モル%以上がより好ましく、3モル%以上が更に好ましい。 When the compound having a cyclic ether group contains the repeating unit B-3, the content of the unit B-3 in the compound having a cyclic ether group is 1 to 65 mol% in all the repeating units of the compound having a cyclic ether group. It is preferable to have. The upper limit is more preferably 45 mol% or less, further preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 mol% or more, further preferably 3 mol% or more.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、以下に示す構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Specific examples of the compound having a cyclic ether group include compounds having the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の市販品としては、例えば、ナフタレン変性エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON HP5000、EPICLON HP4032D(以上、DIC(株)製)などが挙げられる。アルキルジフェノール型エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON 820(DIC(株)製)などが挙げられる。ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂として、jER825、jER827、jER828、jER834、jER1001、jER1002、jER1003、jER1055、jER1007、jER1009、jER1010(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂として、jER806、jER807、jER4004、jER4005、jER4007、jER4010(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、jER152、jER154、jER157S70、jER157S65(以上、三菱ケミカル(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。脂肪族エポキシ樹脂として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、EPOLEAD PB 4700(以上、(株)ダイセル製)、デナコール EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)等が挙げられる。また、オキセタニル基を有する化合物として、OXT-101、OXT-121、OXT-212、OXT-221(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、OXE-10、OXE-30(以上、大阪有機化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036に記載された化合物、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156に記載された化合物、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物、特表2020-515680号公報の段落番号0117~0120に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。 Examples of commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include naphthalene-modified epoxy resins such as EPICLON HP5000 and EPICLON HP4032D (all manufactured by DIC Corporation). Examples of the alkyldiphenol type epoxy resin include EPICLON 820 (manufactured by DIC Corporation). As bisphenol A type epoxy resin, jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (all manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EP (Made by Co., Ltd.) and the like. Bisphenol F type epoxy resins include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation). As mentioned above, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like can be mentioned. Phenolic novolak type epoxy resins include jER152, jER154, jER157S70, jER157S65 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc. Can be mentioned. As cresol novolak type epoxy resin, EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation). , EOCN-1020 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like. As the aliphatic epoxy resin, ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), celoxide 2021P, celoxide 2081, celoxside 2083, celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, EPO Examples include PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation) and the like. In addition, as compounds having an oxetanyl group, OXT-101, OXT-121, OXT-212, OXT-221 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), OXE-10, OXE-30 (above, Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) Made by Co., Ltd.). Examples of the compound having a cyclic ether group include the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP2013-011869, and the compounds described in paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP2014-043556. The compounds described in paragraphs 805 to 0092 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-089408, the compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172, and the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0117 to 0120 of JP-A-2020-515680. It can also be used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量は、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、2質量%以上であることがより好ましく、3質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は15質量%以下であることが好ましく、10質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
 また、環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量は、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して1~300質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、着色組成物の保存安定性の観点から150質量部以下であることがより好ましく、100質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、50質量部以下であることが更により好ましい。下限は、得られる硬化膜の混色抑制の観点から2.5質量部以上であることがより好ましく、5質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、10質量部以上であることが更により好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 2% by mass or more, and further preferably 3% by mass or more. preferable. The upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less.
The content of the compound having a cyclic ether group is C.I. I. It is preferably 1 to 300 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7. The upper limit is more preferably 150 parts by mass or less, further preferably 100 parts by mass or less, still more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability of the coloring composition. The lower limit is more preferably 2.5 parts by mass or more, further preferably 5 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 10 parts by mass or more from the viewpoint of suppressing color mixing of the obtained cured film.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of compound having a cyclic ether group, or may contain two or more kinds of compounds. When two or more compounds having a cyclic ether group are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably in the above range.
<<フリル基含有化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、フリル基を含む化合物(以下、フリル基含有化合物ともいう)を含有することが好ましい。この態様によれば、低温での硬化性に優れる。例えば、重合性化合物としてエチレン性不飽和結合含有基を含有する化合物を用いた場合、フリル基含有化合物が有するフリル基と、上記重合性化合物が有するエチレン性不飽和結合含有基とが、Diels-Alder反応により、150℃以下の低温でも結合を形成するため、低温硬化に優れる。
<< Frill group-containing compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a compound containing a frill group (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing compound). According to this aspect, the curability at a low temperature is excellent. For example, when a compound containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group is used as the polymerizable compound, the frill group contained in the frill group-containing compound and the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group contained in the above-mentioned polymerizable compound are selected from Diels-. Since the Alder reaction forms a bond even at a low temperature of 150 ° C. or lower, it is excellent in low temperature curing.
 フリル基含有化合物は、フリル基(フランから1つの水素原子を除いた基)を含んでいれば特にその構造が限定されるものではない。フリル基含有化合物としては、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0049~0089に記載された化合物を用いることができる。また、フリル基含有化合物としては、特開2000-233581号公報、特開1994-271558号公報、特開1994-293830号公報、特開1996-239421号公報、特開1998-508655号公報、特開2000-001529号公報、特開2003-183348号公報、特開2006-193628号公報、特開2007-186684号公報、特開2010-265377号公報、特開2011-170069号公報などに記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 The structure of the frill group-containing compound is not particularly limited as long as it contains a frill group (a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from furan). As the frill group-containing compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0089 of JP-A-2017-194662 can be used. Examples of the frill group-containing compound include JP-A-2000-233581, JP-A-1994-271558, JP-A-1994-293830, JP-A-1996-239421, JP-A-1998-508655, and special publications. It is described in JP-A-2000-001529, JP-A-2003-183348, JP-A-2006-193628, JP-A-2007-186648, JP-A-2010-265377, JP-A-2011-170069, and the like. It is also possible to use the compound which is used.
 フリル基含有化合物は、モノマーであってもよく、ポリマーであってもよい。得られる膜の耐久性を向上させやすいという理由からポリマーであることが好ましい。ポリマーの場合、重量平均分子量は、2000~70000が好ましい。上限は、60000以下がより好ましく、50000以下が更に好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、4000以上が更に好ましく、5000以上が更により好ましい。モノマーの場合、分子量は、2000未満が好ましく、1800以下がより好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、100以上が好ましく、150以上がより好ましく、175以上が更に好ましい。なお、ポリマータイプのフリル基含有化合物は、本発明の着色組成物における樹脂にも該当する成分である。また、重合性基を有するフリル基含有化合物は、本発明の着色組成物における重合性化合物にも該当する成分である。 The frill group-containing compound may be a monomer or a polymer. A polymer is preferable because it is easy to improve the durability of the obtained film. In the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is preferably 2000 to 70000. The upper limit is more preferably 60,000 or less, further preferably 50,000 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, further preferably 4000 or more, and even more preferably 5000 or more. In the case of a monomer, the molecular weight is preferably less than 2000, more preferably 1800 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 100 or more, more preferably 150 or more, and even more preferably 175 or more. The polymer-type frill group-containing compound is also a component corresponding to the resin in the coloring composition of the present invention. Further, the frill group-containing compound having a polymerizable group is also a component corresponding to the polymerizable compound in the coloring composition of the present invention.
 モノマータイプのフリル基含有化合物(以下、フリル基含有モノマーともいう)としては、下記式(fur-1)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式中、Rfは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Rfは2価の連結基を表す。
Examples of the monomer-type frill group-containing compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing monomer) include a compound represented by the following formula (fur-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In the formula, Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Rf 2 represents a divalent linking group.
 Rfが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 As the divalent linking group represented by Rf 2 , an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and two or more of these are combined. The group is mentioned. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and the like.
 フリル基含有モノマーは、下記式(fur-1-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式中、Rfは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Rf11は-O-または-NH-を表し、Rf12は単結合または2価の連結基を表す。Rf12が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。
The frill group-containing monomer is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (fur-1-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In the formula, Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Rf 11 represents -O- or -NH-, and Rf 12 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. As the divalent linking group represented by Rf 12 , an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S-, and two or more of these are combined. The group is mentioned. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group and the like.
 フリル基含有モノマーの具体例としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。以下の構造式中、Rfは水素原子またはメチル基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Specific examples of the frill group-containing monomer include compounds having the following structures. In the following structural formula, Rf 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 ポリマータイプのフリル基含有化合物(以下、フリル基含有ポリマーともいう)としては、フリル基を含む繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、上記式(fur-1)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることがより好ましい。フリル基含有ポリマーにおいて、全繰り返し単位中、フリル基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、30~70質量%が好ましい。下限は、35質量%以上がより好ましく、40質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下がより好ましく、60質量%以下が更に好ましい。フリル基含有ポリマー中のフリル基の濃度は、フリル基含有ポリマー1gあたり0.5~6.0mmolが好ましく、1.0~4.0mmolがより好ましい。フリル基の濃度が0.5mmol以上、好ましくは1.0mmol以上であると耐溶剤性などにより優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。フリル基の濃度が6.0mmol以下、好ましくは4.0mmol以下であれば、着色組成物の経時安定性が良好である。 The polymer-type frill group-containing compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a frill group-containing polymer) is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit containing a frill group, and is derived from a compound represented by the above formula (fur-1). It is more preferable that the resin contains a unit. In the frill group-containing polymer, the ratio of the repeating unit containing a frill group to all the repeating units is preferably 30 to 70% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 35% by mass or more, further preferably 40% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 65% by mass or less, further preferably 60% by mass or less. The concentration of the frill group in the frill group-containing polymer is preferably 0.5 to 6.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 4.0 mmol per 1 g of the frill group-containing polymer. When the concentration of the frill group is 0.5 mmol or more, preferably 1.0 mmol or more, it is easy to form an excellent cured film due to solvent resistance and the like. When the concentration of the frill group is 6.0 mmol or less, preferably 4.0 mmol or less, the stability over time of the coloring composition is good.
 フリル基含有ポリマーは、フリル基を有する繰り返し単位の他に、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および/または重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。重合性基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基が挙げられる。フリル基含有ポリマーが酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、フリル基含有ポリマーの酸価は10~200mgKOH/gが好ましく、40~130mgKOH/gがより好ましい。酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、フリル基含有ポリマーの全繰り返し単位中、2~25質量%が好ましい。下限は、4質量%以上がより好ましく、5質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下が更に好ましい。フリル基含有ポリマーが重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、フリル基含有ポリマーの全繰り返し単位中20~60質量%が好ましい。下限は、25質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、55質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。フリル基含有ポリマーが、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合には、より耐溶剤性などに優れた硬化膜を形成しやすい。 The frill group-containing polymer may contain a repeating unit having an acid group and / or a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, in addition to the repeating unit having a frill group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group. Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. When the frill group-containing polymer contains a repeating unit having an acid group, the acid value of the frill group-containing polymer is preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 40 to 130 mgKOH / g. The proportion of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 2 to 25% by mass in all the repeating units of the frill group-containing polymer. The lower limit is more preferably 4% by mass or more, further preferably 5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 20% by mass or less, further preferably 15% by mass or less. When the frill group-containing polymer contains a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group is preferably 20 to 60% by mass in all the repeating units of the frill group-containing polymer. The lower limit is more preferably 25% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 55% by mass or less, further preferably 50% by mass or less. When the frill group-containing polymer contains a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, it is easy to form a cured film having better solvent resistance and the like.
 フリル基含有ポリマーは、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0052~0101に記載された方法で製造することができる。 The frill group-containing polymer can be produced by the method described in paragraphs 0052 to 0101 of JP-A-2017-194662.
 フリル基含有化合物の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~70質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、2.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、5.0質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、7.5質量%以上であることが更により好ましい。上限は、65質量%以下であることがより好ましく、60質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、50質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。
 また、フリル基含有化合物としてフリル基含有ポリマーを用いた場合、着色組成物に含まれる樹脂中におけるフリル基含有ポリマーの含有量は、0.1~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、15質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、90質量%以下であることがより好ましく、80質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる樹脂が上述した樹脂b1を含み、かつ、フリル基含有化合物としてフリル基含有ポリマーを用いた場合には、フリル基含有ポリマーの含有量は、樹脂b1の100質量部に対して10~200質量部であることが好ましい。上限は、175質量部以下であることがより好ましく、150質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は、25質量部以上であることがより好ましく、50質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、150質量部以上であることが更により好ましい。樹脂b1とフリル基含有ポリマーとを併用することにより、低温での硬化性に優れ、かつ、分光特性に優れた硬化膜を形成し易い。更に、両者の割合が上記範囲である場合には得られる膜の耐久性をより向上できるという効果も期待できる。
The content of the frill group-containing compound is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. The lower limit is more preferably 2.5% by mass or more, further preferably 5.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 7.5% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 65% by mass or less, further preferably 60% by mass or less, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
When a frill group-containing polymer is used as the frill group-containing compound, the content of the frill group-containing polymer in the resin contained in the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 100% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 10% by mass or more, further preferably 15% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
When the resin used in the coloring composition of the present invention contains the above-mentioned resin b1 and a frill group-containing polymer is used as the frill group-containing compound, the content of the frill group-containing polymer is the same as that of the resin b1. It is preferably 10 to 200 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass. The upper limit is more preferably 175 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 150 parts by mass or more. By using the resin b1 and the frill group-containing polymer in combination, it is easy to form a cured film having excellent curability at a low temperature and excellent spectral characteristics. Further, when the ratio of both is in the above range, the effect that the durability of the obtained film can be further improved can be expected.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤を好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<< Solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the coloring composition. Examples of the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, hydrocarbon-based solvents and the like. For these details, paragraph 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Further, an ester solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and a ketone solvent substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of the organic solvent include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -Heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbi Tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N, N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methylethylketone, Gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane diacetate-1,3-diyl, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol and the like can be mentioned. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may need to be reduced for environmental reasons (for example, 50 parts by mass (parts) with respect to the total amount of organic solvent. Per millision) or less, 10 mass ppm or less, or 1 mass ppm or less).
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない溶剤を用いることが好ましく、溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような高純度溶剤は例えば東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use a solvent having a low metal content, and the metal content of the solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per parts) or less. If necessary, a solvent at the mass ppt (parts per tension) level may be used, and such a high-purity solvent is provided by, for example, Toyo Synthetic Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
 溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from the solvent include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore diameter of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The solvent may contain isomers (compounds having the same number of atoms but different structures). Further, only one kind of isomer may be contained, or a plurality of kinds may be contained.
 本発明において、有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 In the present invention, the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
 着色組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、60~95質量%であることが好ましい。上限は90質量%以下であることがより好ましく、87.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、85質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。下限は、65質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、75質量%以上であることが更により好ましい。溶剤は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 60 to 95% by mass. The upper limit is more preferably 90% by mass or less, further preferably 87.5% by mass or less, and even more preferably 85% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 65% by mass or more, further preferably 70% by mass or more, and further preferably 75% by mass or more. The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、着色組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えばベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶剤として用いられることがあり、残留溶剤として着色組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶剤と同等の沸点を有する溶剤と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した着色組成物の段階いずれの段階でも可能である。 Further, it is preferable that the coloring composition of the present invention does not substantially contain an environmentally regulated substance from the viewpoint of environmental regulations. In the present invention, substantially free of the environmentally regulated substance means that the content of the environmentally regulated substance in the coloring composition is 50 mass ppm or less, and preferably 30 mass ppm or less. It is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Examples of the environmentally regulated substance include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These are REACH (Registration Evolution Analysis and Restriction of Chemicals) rules, PRTR (Pollutant Release and Transfer Register) method, VOC (Volatile and Transfer Registor) method, VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds), and VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds). The method is strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as a solvent in producing each component used in the coloring composition of the present invention, and may be mixed in the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of human safety and consideration for the environment, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. As a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substance, there is a method of heating or depressurizing the inside of the system to raise the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substance or higher and distilling off the environmentally regulated substance from the system to reduce the amount. Further, when distilling off a small amount of an environmentally regulated substance, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to improve efficiency. When a compound having radical polymerization property is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled under reduced pressure in order to prevent the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding and cross-linking between molecules during distillation under reduced pressure. May be. These distillation methods are either a raw material step, a product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution after polymerization or a polyfunctional monomer solution), or a colored composition step prepared by mixing these compounds. It is also possible at the stage of.
<<顔料誘導体>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、発色団の一部分を、酸基、塩基性基またはフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。顔料誘導体を構成する発色団としては、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、フタロシアニン骨格、アンスラキノン骨格、キナクリドン骨格、ジオキサジン骨格、ペリノン骨格、ペリレン骨格、チオインジゴ骨格、イソインドリン骨格、イソインドリノン骨格、キノフタロン骨格、スレン骨格、金属錯体骨格等が挙げられ、キノリン骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン骨格、ジケトピロロピロール骨格、アゾ骨格、キノフタロン骨格、イソインドリン骨格およびフタロシアニン骨格が好ましく、アゾ骨格およびベンゾイミダゾロン骨格がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する酸基としては、スルホ基、カルボキシ基が好ましく、スルホ基がより好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、三級アミノ基がより好ましい。顔料誘導体の具体例としては、特開昭56-118462号公報、特開昭63-264674号公報、特開平01-217077号公報、特開平03-009961号公報、特開平03-026767号公報、特開平03-153780号公報、特開平03-045662号公報、特開平04-285669号公報、特開平06-145546号公報、特開平06-212088号公報、特開平06-240158号公報、特開平10-030063号公報、特開平10-195326号公報、国際公開第2011/024896号の段落番号0086~0098、国際公開第2012/102399号の段落番号0063~0094、国際公開第2017/038252号の段落番号0082、特開2015-151530号公報の段落番号0171、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183、特開2003-081972号公報、特許第5299151号公報、特開2015-172732号公報、特開2014-199308号公報、特開2014-085562号公報、特開2014-035351号公報、特開2008-081565号公報、特開2019-109512号公報および特開2019-133154号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
<< Pigment derivative >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative. Examples of the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of the chromophore is replaced with an acid group, a basic group or a phthalimide methyl group. The chromogens constituting the pigment derivative include quinoline skeleton, benzoimidazolone skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton, azo skeleton, phthalocyanine skeleton, anthracinone skeleton, quinacridone skeleton, dioxazine skeleton, perinone skeleton, perylene skeleton, thioindigo skeleton, and iso. Examples thereof include indolin skeleton, isoindolinone skeleton, quinophthalone skeleton, slene skeleton, metal complex skeleton, etc. , Azo skeleton and benzoimidazolone skeleton are more preferred. As the acid group of the pigment derivative, a sulfo group and a carboxy group are preferable, and a sulfo group is more preferable. As the basic group of the pigment derivative, an amino group is preferable, and a tertiary amino group is more preferable. Specific examples of the pigment derivative include Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 56-118462, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-264674, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 01-217077, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-009961, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-026767. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-153780, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-405662, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 04-285646, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-145546, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-212088, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 06-240158, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-030063, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-195326, paragraph numbers 0086 to 0998 of International Publication No. 2011/024896, paragraph numbers 0063 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2012/102399, International Publication No. 2017/038252. Paragraph No. 0087, Paragraph No. 0171 of JP-A-2015-151530, Paragraph Nos. 0162 to 0183 of JP-A-2011-52065, JP-A-2003-081972, JP-A No. 5299151, JP-A-2015-172732 In JP-A-2014-199308, JP-A-2014-085562, JP-A-2014-035351, JP-A-2008-081565, JP-A-2019-109512, and JP-A-2019-133154 The described compounds are mentioned.
 顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対し、0.1~30質量部が好ましい。この範囲の下限は、0.25質量部以上であることがより好ましく、0.5質量部以上であることがさらに好ましく、0.75質量部以上であることが特に好ましく、1質量部以上であることが一層好ましい。また、この範囲の上限は、25質量部以下であることがより好ましく、20質量部以下であることがさらに好ましく、15質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。顔料誘導体の含有量が上記範囲内であることにより、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上させることができる。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The lower limit of this range is more preferably 0.25 parts by mass or more, further preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 0.75 parts by mass or more, and 1 part by mass or more. It is more preferable to have. Further, the upper limit of this range is more preferably 25 parts by mass or less, further preferably 20 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15 parts by mass or less. When the content of the pigment derivative is within the above range, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved. As the pigment derivative, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used in combination. When two or more types are used in combination, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<ポリアルキレンイミン>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、ポリアルキレンイミンを含有することもできる。ポリアルキレンイミンは例えば分散助剤として用いられる。分散助剤とは、着色組成物中において顔料の分散性を高めるための素材のことである。ポリアルキレンイミンとは、アルキレンイミンを開環重合したポリマーであって1級アミノ基と、2級アミノ基と、3級アミノ基とをそれぞれ含む分岐構造を有するポリマーである。アルキレンイミンの炭素数は2~6が好ましく、2~4がより好ましく、2または3であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
<< Polyalkylene imine >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may also contain polyalkyleneimine. Polyalkyleneimine is used, for example, as a dispersion aid. The dispersion aid is a material for enhancing the dispersibility of the pigment in the coloring composition. The polyalkyleneimine is a polymer obtained by ring-opening polymerization of an alkyleneimine and has a branched structure containing a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group, respectively. The carbon number of the alkyleneimine is preferably 2 to 6, more preferably 2 to 4, further preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
 ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は、200以上であることが好ましく、250以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、100000以下であることが好ましく、50000以下であることがより好ましく、10000以下であることが更に好ましく、2000以下であることが特に好ましい。なお、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量の値について、構造式から分子量が計算できる場合は、ポリアルキレンイミンの分子量は構造式から計算した値である。一方、特定アミン化合物の分子量が構造式から計算できない、あるいは、計算が困難な場合には、沸点上昇法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、沸点上昇法でも測定できない、あるいは、測定が困難な場合は、粘度法で測定した数平均分子量の値を用いる。また、粘度法でも測定できない、あるいは、粘度法での測定が困難な場合は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値での数平均分子量の値を用いる。 The molecular weight of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 200 or more, more preferably 250 or more. The upper limit is preferably 100,000 or less, more preferably 50,000 or less, further preferably 10,000 or less, and particularly preferably 2000 or less. When the molecular weight of polyalkyleneimine can be calculated from the structural formula, the molecular weight of polyalkyleneimine is the value calculated from the structural formula. On the other hand, when the molecular weight of the specific amine compound cannot be calculated from the structural formula or is difficult to calculate, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the boiling point elevation method is used. If the measurement cannot be performed by the boiling point elevation method or is difficult to measure, the value of the number average molecular weight measured by the viscosity method is used. If it cannot be measured by the viscosity method or it is difficult to measure by the viscosity method, the value of the number average molecular weight in the polystyrene conversion value measured by the GPC (gel permeation chromatography) method is used.
 ポリアルキレンイミンのアミン価は5mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、15mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。 The amine value of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 5 mmol / g or more, more preferably 10 mmol / g or more, and even more preferably 15 mmol / g or more.
 アルキレンイミンの具体例としては、エチレンイミン、プロピレンイミン、1,2-ブチレンイミン、2,3-ブチレンイミンなどが挙げられ、エチレンイミンまたはプロピレンイミンであることが好ましく、エチレンイミンであることがより好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、ポリエチレンイミンであることが特に好ましい。また、ポリエチレンイミンは、1級アミノ基を、1級アミノ基と2級アミノ基と3級アミノ基との合計に対して10モル%以上含むことが好ましく、20モル%以上含むことがより好ましく、30モル%以上含むことが更に好ましい。ポリエチレンイミンの市販品としては、エポミンSP-003、SP-006、SP-012、SP-018、SP-200、P-1000(以上、(株)日本触媒製)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the alkyleneimine include ethyleneimine, propyleneimine, 1,2-butyleneimine, 2,3-butyleneimine, and the like, preferably ethyleneimine or propyleneimine, and more preferably ethyleneimine. preferable. The polyalkyleneimine is particularly preferably polyethyleneimine. Further, polyethyleneimine preferably contains a primary amino group in an amount of 10 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, based on the total of the primary amino group, the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group. , 30 mol% or more is more preferable. Examples of commercially available polyethyleneimine products include Epomin SP-003, SP-006, SP-012, SP-018, SP-200, and P-1000 (all manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.).
 着色組成物の全固形分中におけるポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は0.1~5質量%であることが好ましい。下限は0.2質量%以上であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、1質量%以上であることが更により好ましい。上限は4.5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、4質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、3質量%以下であることが更により好ましい。また、ポリアルキレンイミンの含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して0.5~20質量部であることが好ましい。下限は0.6質量部以上であることがより好ましく、1質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、2質量部以上であることが更により好ましい。上限は10質量部以下であることがより好ましく、8質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。ポリアルキレンイミンは、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合はそれらの合計量が上記範囲であることが好ましい。 The content of polyalkyleneimine in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. The lower limit is more preferably 0.2% by mass or more, further preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 4.5% by mass or less, further preferably 4% by mass or less, and even more preferably 3% by mass or less. The content of polyalkyleneimine is preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The lower limit is more preferably 0.6 parts by mass or more, further preferably 1 part by mass or more, and further preferably 2 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 10 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 8 parts by mass or less. As the polyalkyleneimine, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is in the above range.
<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させたり、硬化温度を下げる目的で、硬化促進剤を添加してもよい。硬化促進剤としては、分子内に2個以上のメルカプト基を有する多官能チオール化合物などが挙げられる。多官能チオール化合物は安定性、臭気、解像性、現像性、密着性等の改良を目的として添加してもよい。多官能チオール化合物は、2級のアルカンチオール類であることが好ましく、式(T1)で表される化合物であることがより好ましい。
 式(T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(式(T1)中、nは2~4の整数を表し、Lは2~4価の連結基を表す。)
<< Curing Accelerator >>
In the coloring composition of the present invention, a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of accelerating the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature. Examples of the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule. The polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like. The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol compound, and more preferably a compound represented by the formula (T1).
Equation (T1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a linking group of 2 to 4 valences.)
 式(T1)において、連結基Lは炭素数2~12の脂肪族基であることが好ましく、nが2であり、Lが炭素数2~12のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。 In the formula (T1), the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
 また、硬化促進剤は、メチロール系化合物(例えば特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246において、架橋剤として例示されている化合物)、アミン類、ホスホニウム塩、アミジン塩、アミド化合物(以上、例えば特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186に記載の硬化剤)、塩基発生剤(例えば、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物)、シアネート化合物(例えば、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071に記載の化合物)、アルコキシシラン化合物(例えば、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物)、オニウム塩化合物(例えば、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0216に酸発生剤として例示されている化合物、特開2009-180949号公報に記載の化合物)などを用いることもできる。 Further, the curing accelerator is a methylol-based compound (for example, a compound exemplified as a cross-linking agent in paragraph No. 0246 of JP-A-2015-034963), amines, phosphonium salt, amidin salt, amide compound (for example, above, for example. A curing agent described in paragraph No. 0186 of JP2013-041165A, a base generator (eg, an ionic compound described in JP2014-0551114), a cyanate compound (eg, JP2012-150180). A compound described in paragraph No. 0071 of JP-A), an alkoxysilane compound (for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2011-253504), and an onium salt compound (eg, JP-A-2015-034963). A compound exemplified as an acid generator in paragraph No. 0216, a compound described in JP-A-2009-180949) and the like can also be used.
 本発明の着色組成物が硬化促進剤を含有する場合、硬化促進剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curing accelerator, the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass in the total solid content of the coloring composition. More preferably by mass.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することできる。シランカップリング剤としては、一分子中に少なくとも2種の反応性の異なる官能基を有するシラン化合物が好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、ビニル基、エポキシ基、スチレン基、メタクリル基、アミノ基、イソシアヌレート基、ウレイド基、メルカプト基、スルフィド基、および、イソシアネート基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の基と、アルコキシ基とを有するシラン化合物が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-602)、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-603)、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-903)、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-503)、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、KBM-403)等が挙げられる。シランカップリング剤の詳細については、特開2013-254047号公報の段落番号0155~0158の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。本発明の着色組成物がシランカップリング剤を含有する場合、シランカップリング剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.001~20質量%が好ましく、0.01~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1質量%~5質量%が特に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を、1種のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Silane Coupling Agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. As the silane coupling agent, a silane compound having at least two kinds of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule is preferable. The silane coupling agent includes at least one group selected from a vinyl group, an epoxy group, a styrene group, a methacrylic group, an amino group, an isocyanurate group, a ureido group, a mercapto group, a sulfide group, and an isocyanate group, and an alkoxy group. A silane compound having and is preferable. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include N-2- (aminoethyl) -3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-2- (aminoethyl) -3. -Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., KBM-603), 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., KBM-903), 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (Shin-Etsu) KBE-903) manufactured by Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd., 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (KBM-503 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , KBM-403) and the like. For details of the silane coupling agent, the description in paragraphs 0155 to 0158 of JP2013-254047A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a silane coupling agent, the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. Is more preferable, and 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass is particularly preferable. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more kinds of silane coupling agents. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)等が挙げられる。本発明の着色組成物が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を、1種のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< Polymerization inhibitor >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and the like. Examples thereof include 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, first cerium salt, etc.). When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types of polymerization inhibitors. When two or more kinds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤は、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物などを用いることができる。これらの詳細については、特開2012-208374号公報の段落番号0052~0072、特開2013-068814号公報の段落番号0317~0334、特開2016-162946号公報の段落番号0061~0080の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV-503(大東化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ミヨシ油脂製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収剤として特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0049~0059に記載の化合物も使用できる。本発明の着色組成物が紫外線吸収剤を含有する場合、紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分中0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~5質量%がより好ましく、0.1~3質量%が特に好ましい。また、紫外線吸収剤は、1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<< UV absorber >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber. As the ultraviolet absorber, a conjugated diene compound, an aminodiene compound, a salicylate compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzotriazole compound, an acrylonitrile compound, a hydroxyphenyltriazine compound, an indole compound, a triazine compound and the like can be used. For details thereof, refer to paragraph numbers 0052 to 0072 of JP2012-208374A, paragraph numbers 0317 to 0334 of JP2013-066814, and paragraph numbers 0061 to 0080 of JP2016-162946. It can be taken into consideration and these contents are incorporated in the present specification. Examples of commercially available products of ultraviolet absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Kagaku Co., Ltd.). Examples of the benzotriazole compound include the MYUA series made of Miyoshi Oil & Fat (The Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016). Further, as the ultraviolet absorber, the compounds described in paragraphs 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967 can also be used. When the coloring composition of the present invention contains an ultraviolet absorber, the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferable, and 0.1 to 3% by mass is particularly preferable. Further, as the ultraviolet absorber, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. When two or more types are used, the total amount is preferably in the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Surfactant >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. As for the surfactant, the surfactant described in paragraph Nos. 0238 to 0245 of International Publication No. 2015/166779 is mentioned, and the content thereof is incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明において、界面活性剤はフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。着色組成物にフッ素系界面活性剤を含有させることで液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、省液性をより改善することができる。また、厚みムラの小さい膜を形成することもできる。 In the present invention, the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based surfactant. By containing a fluorine-based surfactant in the coloring composition, the liquid characteristics (particularly, fluidity) can be further improved, and the liquid saving property can be further improved. It is also possible to form a film having a small thickness unevenness.
 また、環境対応の観点から界面活性剤としてシリコーン系界面活性剤を用いることも好ましい。 It is also preferable to use a silicone-based surfactant as the surfactant from the viewpoint of environmental friendliness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorine-based surfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity in the thickness of the coating film and liquid saving, and has good solubility in a coloring composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、特開2014-041318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開第2014/017669号の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤、特開2020-008634号公報に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、R-41、R-41-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント208G、215M、245F、601AD、601ADH2、602A、610FM、710FL、710FM、710FS、FTX-218、(以上、株)NEOS製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorine-based surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-041318 (paragraphs 0060 to 0064 of International Publication No. 2014/017669) and the like, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-. The surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 132503 and the surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634 are mentioned, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Commercially available products of fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafax F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560. , F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, R-41, R -141-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (above, manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo) 3M Co., Ltd.), Surfron S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (above, AGC Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (all manufactured by OMNOVA), Surfactant 208G, 215M, 245F, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 610FM, 710FL, 710FM, 710F , (Above, manufactured by NEOS Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファックDSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えばメガファックDS-21が挙げられる。 Further, the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which a portion of the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied. Can be suitably used. Examples of such a fluorine-based surfactant include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2016-216602号公報に記載されたフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound. Examples of such a fluorine-based surfactant include the fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2010-032698号公報の段落番号0016~0037に記載されたフッ素含有界面活性剤や、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
As the fluorine-based surfactant, a block polymer can also be used. The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. Further, the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
The weight average molecular weight of the above compounds is preferably 3000 to 50,000, for example 14000. Among the above compounds,% indicating the ratio of the repeating unit is mol%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、DIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295 of JP2010-164965, Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, manufactured by DIC Corporation. RS-72-K and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, the compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
 また、国際公開第2020/084854号に記載の界面活性剤を、炭素数6以上のパーフルオロアルキル基を有する界面活性剤の代替として用いることも、環境規制の観点から好ましい。 It is also preferable from the viewpoint of environmental regulation to use the surfactant described in International Publication No. 2020/088454 as a substitute for the surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms.
 また、式(fi-1)で表される含フッ素イミド塩化合物を界面活性剤として用いることも好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 式(fi-1)において、mは1または2を表し、nは1~4の整数を表し、αは1または2を表し、Xα+はα価の金属イオン、第1級アンモニウムイオン、第2級アンモニウムイオン、第3級アンモニウムイオン、第4級アンモニウムイオンまたはNH を表す。
It is also preferable to use a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by the formula (fi-1) as a surfactant.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
In the formula (fi-1), m represents 1 or 2, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, α represents 1 or 2, and X α + represents an α-valent metal ion, a primary ammonium ion, and a first. Represents a secondary ammonium ion, a tertiary ammonium ion , a quaternary ammonium ion or NH 4+ .
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(BASF社製)、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1(BASF社製)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(和光純薬工業(株)製)、パイオニンD-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ethers, polyoxyethylene stearyl ethers, etc. Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF) , Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsparse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (Manufactured by Kogyo Co., Ltd.), Pionin D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd.), Orfin E1010, Surfinol 104, 400, 440 (manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) And so on.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400、FZ-2122(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)、TSF-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the silicone-based surfactant include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, and FZ-2122. Dow Corning Co., Ltd.), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6001, KF- Examples thereof include 6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (above, manufactured by Big Chemie) and the like.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種のみでもよく、2種以上でもよい。2種以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 3.0% by mass. The surfactant may be only one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
<<その他添加剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加剤、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加剤としては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落番号0155~0156に記載の添加剤を挙げることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、酸化防止剤としては、例えばフェノール化合物、リン系化合物(例えば特開2011-090147号公報の段落番号0042に記載の化合物)、チオエーテル化合物などを用いることができる。市販品としては、例えば(株)ADEKA製のアデカスタブシリーズ(AO-20、AO-30、AO-40、AO-50、AO-50F、AO-60、AO-60G、AO-80、AO-330など)が挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤として、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された多官能ヒンダードアミン酸化防止剤、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された酸化防止剤、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された酸化防止剤を用いることもできる。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。また、本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、潜在酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。潜在酸化防止剤としては、酸化防止剤として機能する部位が保護基で保護された化合物であって、100~250℃で加熱するか、又は酸/塩基触媒存在下で80~200℃で加熱することにより保護基が脱離して酸化防止剤として機能する化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2014/021023号、国際公開第2017/030005号、特開2017-008219号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。市販品としては、アデカアークルズGPA-5001((株)ADEKA製)等が挙げられる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0078に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落0081に記載の熱重合防止剤、特開2018-091940号公報の段落番号0242に記載の貯蔵安定化剤を含有することができる。
<< Other additives >>
Various additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, antiaggregating agents and the like can be added to the coloring composition of the present invention, if necessary. Examples of these additives include the additives described in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2004-295116, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification. Further, as the antioxidant, for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus-based compound (for example, the compound described in paragraph No. 0042 of JP-A-2011-090147), a thioether compound and the like can be used. Commercially available products include, for example, the ADEKA stub series (AO-20, AO-30, AO-40, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-80, AO-" manufactured by ADEKA Corporation. 330 etc.). Further, as the antioxidant, the polyfunctional hindered amine antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/006600, the antioxidant described in International Publication No. 2017/1604024, paragraph Nos. 0023 to Patent No. 6268967. The antioxidant described in 0048 can also be used. Only one kind of antioxidant may be used, or two or more kinds may be used. In addition, the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a latent antioxidant, if necessary. The latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site that functions as an antioxidant is protected by a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250 ° C. or at 80 to 200 ° C. in the presence of an acid / base catalyst. This includes compounds in which the protecting group is desorbed and functions as an antioxidant. Specific examples of the latent antioxidant include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA ARKULS GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like. Further, the coloring composition of the present invention includes a sensitizer and a photostabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A-2004-295116, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 1981 of JP-A-2004-091940, and JP-A-2018-091940. The storage stabilizer described in paragraph No. 0242 of the publication can be contained.
 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の着色組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない着色組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の着色組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the viewpoint of environmental regulation, the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be restricted. In the coloring composition of the present invention, when the content of the above-mentioned compound is reduced, the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid (particularly, the perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group), a salt thereof, and a per. The content of the fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly the perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb. The coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and salts thereof, as well as perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and salts thereof. For example, by using a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid can be used. And a coloring composition that is substantially free of salts thereof may be selected. Examples of compounds that can substitute for the regulated compound include compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms of the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above-mentioned contents do not prevent the use of perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a perfluoroalkyl sulfonic acid and a salt thereof, and a perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and a salt thereof within the maximum allowable range.
<収容容器>
 本発明の着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、原材料や着色組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成する多層ボトルや6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。また、容器内壁は、容器内壁からの金属溶出を防ぎ、組成物の保存安定性を高めたり、成分変質を抑制するなど目的で、ガラス製やステンレス製などにすることも好ましい。
<Accommodation container>
The container for containing the coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used. In addition, as a storage container, for the purpose of suppressing impurities from being mixed into raw materials and coloring compositions, a multi-layer bottle having a container inner wall made of 6 types and 6 layers of resin and a bottle having 6 types of resin having a 7-layer structure. It is also preferable to use. Examples of such a container include the container described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-123351. Further, the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, improving the storage stability of the composition, and suppressing the deterioration of the components.
<着色組成物の製造方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して製造できる。着色組成物の製造に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して着色組成物を製造してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を製造してもよい。
<Manufacturing method of coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be produced by mixing the above-mentioned components. In the production of the coloring composition, all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to produce the coloring composition, or each component may be appropriately used as two or more solutions or dispersions, if necessary. Then, these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to produce a colored composition.
 また、着色組成物の製造に際して、顔料などの粒子を分散させるプロセスを含んでいてもよい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。 Further, in the production of the coloring composition, a process of dispersing particles such as pigments may be included. In the process of dispersing the pigment, the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion and the like. Further, in the pulverization of the pigment in the sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use beads having a small diameter and to perform the treatment under the condition that the pulverization efficiency is increased by increasing the filling rate of the beads. Further, it is preferable to remove the coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation or the like after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and disperser for dispersing pigments are "Dispersion Technology Complete Works, Published by Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" and "Dispersion technology centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and industrial". Practical application The process and disperser described in Paragraph No. 0022 of JP-A-2015-157893, "Comprehensive Data Collection, Published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978" can be preferably used. Further, in the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be miniaturized in the salt milling step. For the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step, for example, the descriptions in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be referred to.
 着色組成物の製造にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)、ポリフッ化ビニリデン(PVDF)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等の素材を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)およびナイロンが好ましい。 In the production of the coloring composition, it is preferable to filter the coloring composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. As the filter, any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation. For example, fluororesins such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg, nylon-6, nylon-6,6), and polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP). Examples thereof include filters using materials such as (including high-density, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene resin). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high-density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μmが好ましく、0.01~3.0μmがより好ましく、0.05~0.5μmが更に好ましい。フィルタの孔径が上記範囲であれば、微細な異物をより確実に除去できる。フィルタの孔径値については、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。フィルタは、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NIEY、DFA4201NAEY、DFA4201J006Pなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)および株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタを用いることができる。 The pore diameter of the filter is preferably 0.01 to 7.0 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 μm, and even more preferably 0.05 to 0.5 μm. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably. For the hole diameter value of the filter, the nominal value of the filter manufacturer can be referred to. As the filter, various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NIEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nippon Microlith Co., Ltd.), KITZ Microfilter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used. ..
 また、フィルタとしてファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられる。市販品としては、ロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)が挙げられる。フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタ(例えば、第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタなど)を組み合わせてもよい。その際、各フィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。また、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみに対して行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタでろ過を行ってもよい。 It is also preferable to use a fiber-like filter medium as the filter. Examples of the fiber-like filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber and the like. Examples of commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno Co., Ltd. When using filters, different filters (eg, first filter and second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, the filtration with each filter may be performed only once or twice or more. Further, filters having different pore diameters may be combined within the above-mentioned range. Further, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing the other components, the filtration may be performed with the second filter.
<硬化膜>
 本発明の硬化膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物を硬化して得られた膜である。本発明の硬化膜は、カラーフィルタなどに用いることができる。具体的には、カラーフィルタの着色層(画素)として好ましく用いることができ、緑色画素としてより好ましく用いられる。本発明の硬化膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できるが、0.5~3.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は0.8μm以上がより好ましく、1.0μm以上がさらに好ましく、1.1μm以上がさらにより好ましい。上限は2.5μm以下がより好ましく、2.0μm以下がさらに好ましく、1.8μm以下がさらにより好ましい。
<Hardened film>
The cured film of the present invention is a film obtained by curing the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention. The cured film of the present invention can be used for a color filter or the like. Specifically, it can be preferably used as a colored layer (pixel) of a color filter, and more preferably used as a green pixel. The film thickness of the cured film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted depending on the intended purpose, but is preferably 0.5 to 3.0 μm. The lower limit is more preferably 0.8 μm or more, further preferably 1.0 μm or more, and even more preferably 1.1 μm or more. The upper limit is more preferably 2.5 μm or less, further preferably 2.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 1.8 μm or less.
 本発明の硬化膜は、495nm以上550nm未満の波長の光に対する透過率の最大値は65%以上であることが好ましく、70%以上であることがより好ましく、75%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、495nm以上550nm未満の波長の光に対する平均透過率は60%以上であることが好ましく、65%以上であることがより好ましく、70%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、波長450nmの光に対する透過率は10%以下であることが好ましく、5%以下であることがより好ましく、2%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、400nm以上450nm以下の波長の光に対する平均透過率は10%以下であることが好ましく、5%以下であることがより好ましく、1%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、540nm以上610nm以下の波長の光に対する平均透過率は60%以下であることが好ましく、50%以下であることがより好ましく、40%以下であることが更に好ましい。
In the cured film of the present invention, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 65% or more, more preferably 70% or more, still more preferably 75% or more. ..
Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 495 nm or more and less than 550 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 65% or more, still more preferably 70% or more.
Further, the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 2% or less.
Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less, and further preferably 1% or less.
Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less is preferably 60% or less, more preferably 50% or less, still more preferably 40% or less.
<カラーフィルタ>
 次に、本発明のカラーフィルタについて説明する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、上述した本発明の硬化膜を有する。好ましくは、カラーフィルタの着色画素として、より好ましくは緑色画素として、本発明の硬化膜を有する。本発明のカラーフィルタは、固体撮像素子や表示装置に用いることができる。
<Color filter>
Next, the color filter of the present invention will be described. The color filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention. The cured film of the present invention is preferably provided as a colored pixel of a color filter, more preferably as a green pixel. The color filter of the present invention can be used for a solid-state image sensor or a display device.
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の硬化膜の画素の他に、他の色相の着色画素を有していることが好ましい。他の色相の着色画素としては、青色画素、赤色画素、黄色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素などが挙げられる。本発明のカラーフィルタの好ましい態様として、本発明の硬化膜で構成された緑色画素と、赤色画素と、青色画素とを有する態様が挙げられる。カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。また、米国特許出願公開第2018/0040656号明細書に記載の構成で隔壁を形成しても良い。 It is preferable that the color filter of the present invention has colored pixels of other hues in addition to the pixels of the cured film of the present invention. Examples of the colored pixels of other hues include blue pixels, red pixels, yellow pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and the like. A preferred embodiment of the color filter of the present invention includes an embodiment having a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel composed of the cured film of the present invention. The color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Further, the partition wall may be formed by the configuration described in US Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0040656.
 本発明の硬化膜の画素と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい赤色画素は、赤色着色剤を含むことが好ましい。赤色画素に含まれる着色剤中における赤色着色剤の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましい。赤色画素に含まれる着色剤中における赤色着色剤の含有量の上限は、100質量%であってもよく、99質量%以下であってもよく、95質量%以下であってもよく、90質量%以下であってもよい。また、赤色画素は、赤色着色剤を40質量%以上含むことが好ましく、50質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、60質量%以上含むことが更に好ましい。また、赤色着色剤の含有量の上限は、80質量%以下が好ましく、70質量%以下がより好ましく、60質量%以下が更に好ましい。赤色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等の赤色顔料が挙げられ、C.I.ピグメントレッド177,179,254,264,269,272が好ましい。 The red pixel preferably used in combination with the pixel of the cured film of the present invention preferably contains a red colorant. The content of the red colorant in the colorant contained in the red pixel is preferably 30% by mass or more, and more preferably 40% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content of the red colorant in the colorant contained in the red pixel may be 100% by mass, 99% by mass or less, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass. It may be less than or equal to%. Further, the red pixel preferably contains 40% by mass or more of the red colorant, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and further preferably 60% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content of the red colorant is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 60% by mass or less. Examples of the red colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48: 2,48:3,48:4 49,49: 1,49: 2,52: 1,52: 2,53: 1,57: 1,60: 1,63: 1,66,67,81: 1,81: 2,81: 3, 83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291 Red pigments such as 294, 295, 296, 297, etc. may be mentioned. I. Pigment Red 177,179,254,264,269,272 is preferred.
 上記赤色画素は、赤色着色剤の他に、更に黄色着色剤を含むことが好ましい。黄色着色剤の含有量は、赤色着色剤の100質量部に対して3~60質量部であることが好ましく、5~50質量部であることがより好ましく、10~40質量部であることが更に好ましい。黄色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられ、C.I.ピグメントイエロー138,139,150,185が好ましい。 The red pixel preferably contains a yellow colorant in addition to the red colorant. The content of the yellow colorant is preferably 3 to 60 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass, and preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant. More preferred. Examples of the yellow colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35: 1,36, 36: 1,37,37: 1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97, 98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179, Yellow pigments such as 180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236 and the like can be mentioned. I. Pigment Yellow 138,139,150,185 is preferred.
 上記赤色画素は、400~550nmの波長の光に対する透過率の最大値が5%以下であることが好ましく、3%以下であることがより好ましく、1%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、400~550nmの波長の光に対する平均透過率は3%以下であることが好ましく、1%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、600~700nmの波長の光に対する透過率の最小値は10%以上であることが好ましく、25%以上であることがより好ましく、40%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、600~700nmの波長の光に対する平均透過率は80%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることがより好ましく、95%以上であることが更に好ましい。 In the red pixel, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 550 nm is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 3% or less, and further preferably 1% or less. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 550 nm is preferably 3% or less, more preferably 1% or less, still more preferably 0.5% or less. Further, the minimum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 600 to 700 nm is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 25% or more, still more preferably 40% or more. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 600 to 700 nm is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 90% or more, still more preferably 95% or more.
 本発明の硬化膜の画素と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい青色画素は、青色着色剤を含むことが好ましい。青色画素に含まれる着色剤中における青色着色剤の含有量は、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、60質量%以上であることがより好ましい。また、青色画素は、青色着色剤を20質量%以上含むことが好ましく、25質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、30質量%以上含むことが更に好ましい。青色着色剤の含有量の上限は、80質量%以下が好ましく、70質量%以下がより好ましく、60質量%以下が更に好ましい。青色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等の青色顔料が挙げられ、C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6が好ましい。 The blue pixels preferably used in combination with the pixels of the cured film of the present invention preferably contain a blue colorant. The content of the blue colorant in the colorant contained in the blue pixel is preferably 40% by mass or more, and more preferably 60% by mass or more. Further, the blue pixel preferably contains 20% by mass or more of the blue colorant, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and further preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit of the content of the blue colorant is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, and further preferably 60% by mass or less. Examples of the blue colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15: 1,15: 2,15: 3,15: 4,15: 6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88 etc. Pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 is preferred.
 上記青色画素は、青色着色剤の他に、更に紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。紫色着色剤の含有量は、青色着色剤の100質量部に対して10~90質量部であることが好ましく、20~75質量部であることがより好ましく、30~60質量部であることが更に好ましい。紫色着色剤および赤色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料、キサンテン化合物などが挙げられる。キサンテン化合物としては、特開2016-180834号公報の段落番号0025~0077に記載の側鎖にカチオン性基を有する樹脂とキサンテン系酸性染料とを反応させて得られた造塩化合物などが挙げられる。 It is more preferable that the blue pixel contains at least one selected from a purple colorant and a red colorant in addition to the blue colorant. The content of the purple colorant is preferably 10 to 90 parts by mass, more preferably 20 to 75 parts by mass, and more preferably 30 to 60 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the blue colorant. More preferred. Examples of the purple colorant and the red colorant include C.I. I. Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61 and other purple pigments, xanthene compounds and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the xanthene compound include salt-forming compounds obtained by reacting a resin having a cationic group in the side chain described in paragraphs 0025 to 0077 of JP-A-2016-180834 with a xanthene-based acid dye. ..
 上記青色画素は、400~500nmの波長の光に対する透過率の最大値が50%以上であることが好ましく、60%以上であることがより好ましく、70%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、400~500nmの波長の光に対する平均透過率は40%以上であることが好ましく、50%以上であることがより好ましく、60%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、550~700nmの波長の光に対する透過率の最小値は30%以下であることが好ましく、20%以下であることがより好ましく、10%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、550~700nmの波長の光に対する平均透過率は25%以下であることが好ましく、10%以下であることがより好ましく、5%以下であることが更に好ましい。 In the blue pixel, the maximum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 50% or more, more preferably 60% or more, still more preferably 70% or more. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is preferably 40% or more, more preferably 50% or more, still more preferably 60% or more. Further, the minimum value of the transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 20% or less, still more preferably 10% or less. Further, the average transmittance for light having a wavelength of 550 to 700 nm is preferably 25% or less, more preferably 10% or less, and further preferably 5% or less.
<構造体>
 本発明の構造体は、上述した本発明の着色組成物を用いて得られる緑色画素と、赤色画素と、青色画素とを有する。緑色画素は、上述した本発明の硬化膜の項で説明した分光特性を有することが好ましい。また、赤色画素および青色画素は、上述したカラーフィルタの項で説明した分光特性を有することが好ましい。
<Structure>
The structure of the present invention has green pixels, red pixels, and blue pixels obtained by using the coloring composition of the present invention described above. The green pixel preferably has the spectral characteristics described in the section of the cured film of the present invention described above. Further, it is preferable that the red pixel and the blue pixel have the spectral characteristics described in the above-mentioned color filter section.
<画素の形成方法>
 画素の形成方法について説明する。本発明の着色組成物を用いることで、例えば、緑色画素を形成することができる。
<Pixel formation method>
A method of forming pixels will be described. By using the coloring composition of the present invention, for example, green pixels can be formed.
 画素の形成方法は、支持体上に着色組成物を塗布して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、この着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、露光後の着色組成物層を現像する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。画素の形成にあたり、全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で行うことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、「全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で行う」とは、着色組成物を用いて画素を形成する工程の全てを、150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。露光後の着色組成物層を現像した後、更に加熱する工程を設ける場合は、この加熱する工程も150℃以下の温度で行うことを意味する。以下、各工程について詳細を述べる。 The pixel forming method includes a step of applying a coloring composition on a support to form a coloring composition layer, a step of exposing the coloring composition layer in a pattern, and developing a coloring composition layer after exposure. It is preferable to include the steps to be performed. It is preferable to form the pixels at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process. In the present invention, "performing at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process" means that all the steps of forming pixels using the coloring composition are performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. When a step of further heating after developing the colored composition layer after exposure is provided, it means that this heating step is also performed at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower. Hereinafter, each step will be described in detail.
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、支持体上に着色組成物を塗布して着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、ガラス基板、ポリカーボネート基板、ポリエステル基板、芳香族ポリアミド基板、ポリアミドイミド基板、ポリイミド基板等が挙げられる。これらの基板上には有機発光層が形成されていてもよい。また、基板上には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは表面の平坦化のために下塗り層が設けられていてもよい。下塗り層は、例えば、上述した本発明の着色組成物から着色剤を除いた組成物などを用いて形成することもできる。下塗り層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。下塗り層の表面接触角が上記範囲であれば、樹脂組成物の塗れ性が良好である。下塗り層の表面接触角の調整は、たとえば、界面活性剤の添加などの方法で行うことができる。 In the step of forming the coloring composition layer, the coloring composition is applied on the support to form the coloring composition layer. Examples of the support include a glass substrate, a polycarbonate substrate, a polyester substrate, an aromatic polyamide substrate, a polyamide-imide substrate, a polyimide substrate and the like. An organic light emitting layer may be formed on these substrates. Further, an undercoat layer may be provided on the substrate for improving the adhesion with the upper layer, preventing the diffusion of substances, or flattening the surface. The undercoat layer can also be formed, for example, by using the composition obtained by removing the colorant from the above-mentioned coloring composition of the present invention. The surface contact angle of the undercoat layer is preferably 20 to 70 ° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80 ° when measured with water. When the surface contact angle of the undercoat layer is within the above range, the resin composition has good coatability. The surface contact angle of the undercoat layer can be adjusted by, for example, adding a surfactant.
 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(たとえば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えばオンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷法などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、着色組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As a method for applying the coloring composition, a known method can be used. For example, a drop method (drop cast); a slit coat method; a spray method; a roll coat method; a rotary coating method (spin coating); a cast coating method; a slit and spin method; a pre-wet method (for example, JP-A-2009-145395). Methods described in the publication); Inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc. Various printing methods; transfer method using a mold or the like; nano-imprint method and the like can be mentioned. The method of application in inkjet is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the method shown in "Expandable / usable inkjet-infinite possibilities seen in patents-, published in February 2005, Sumi Betechno Research" (especially from page 115). Page 133), JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, and the like. Can be mentioned. Further, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the description of International Publication No. 2017/030174 and International Publication No. 2017/018419 can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、80℃以下が好ましく、70℃以下がより好ましく、60℃以下が更に好ましく、50℃以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば、40℃以上とすることができる。プリベーク時間は、10~3600秒が好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). When prebaking is performed, the prebake temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, further preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 50 ° C. or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher. The prebake time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed on a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
 次に、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step). For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing the colored composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. As a result, the exposed portion can be cured.
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Examples of radiation (light) that can be used for exposure include g-line and i-line. Further, light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of the light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm), ArF line (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) is preferable. Further, a long wave light source having a diameter of 300 nm or more can also be used.
 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。パルス露光の場合、パルス幅は、100ナノ秒(ns)以下であることが好ましく、50ナノ秒以下であることがより好ましく、30ナノ秒以下であることが更に好ましい。パルス幅の下限は、特に限定はないが、1フェムト秒(fs)以上とすることができ、10フェムト秒以上とすることもできる。周波数は、1kHz以上であることが好ましく、2kHz以上であることがより好ましく、4kHz以上であることが更に好ましい。周波数の上限は50kHz以下であることが好ましく、20kHz以下であることがより好ましく、10kHz以下であることが更に好ましい。最大瞬間照度は、50000000W/m以上であることが好ましく、100000000W/m以上であることがより好ましく、200000000W/m以上であることが更に好ましい。また、最大瞬間照度の上限は、1000000000W/m以下であることが好ましく、800000000W/m以下であることがより好ましく、500000000W/m以下であることが更に好ましい。なお、パルス幅とは、パルス周期における光が照射されている時間のことである。また、周波数とは、1秒あたりのパルス周期の回数のことである。また、最大瞬間照度とは、パルス周期における光が照射されている時間内での平均照度のことである。また、パルス周期とは、パルス露光における光の照射と休止を1サイクルとする周期のことである。 Further, at the time of exposure, light may be continuously irradiated for exposure, or pulsed irradiation may be performed for exposure (pulse exposure). The pulse exposure is an exposure method of a method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of a short time (for example, a millisecond level or less). In the case of pulse exposure, the pulse width is preferably 100 nanoseconds (ns) or less, more preferably 50 nanoseconds or less, and even more preferably 30 nanoseconds or less. The lower limit of the pulse width is not particularly limited, but may be 1 femtosecond (fs) or more, and may be 10 femtoseconds or more. The frequency is preferably 1 kHz or higher, more preferably 2 kHz or higher, and even more preferably 4 kHz or higher. The upper limit of the frequency is preferably 50 kHz or less, more preferably 20 kHz or less, and further preferably 10 kHz or less. The maximum instantaneous illuminance is preferably 50,000,000,000 W / m 2 or more, more preferably 100,000,000 W / m 2 or more, and even more preferably 200,000,000 W / m 2 or more. Further, the upper limit of the maximum instantaneous illuminance is preferably 1000000000000 W / m 2 or less, more preferably 800000000 W / m 2 or less, and further preferably 500000000 W / m 2 or less. The pulse width is the time during which light is irradiated in the pulse period. The frequency is the number of pulse cycles per second. Further, the maximum instantaneous illuminance is the average illuminance within the time when the light is irradiated in the pulse cycle. Further, the pulse cycle is a cycle in which irradiation and pause of light in pulse exposure are set as one cycle.
 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましい。下限は、0.05J/cm以上であることがより好ましく、0.2J/cm以上であることが更に好ましく、0.5J/cm以上であることが更により好ましく、0.8J/cm以上であることがより一層好ましく、1.0J/cm以上であることが更に一層好ましい。上限は、2.0J/cm以下であることがより好ましく、1.5J/cm以下であることが更に好ましい。また、露光照度は、適宜設定することが可能であり、例えば、50mW/cm~10W/cmであることが好ましい。露光照度の下限は、500mW/cm以上であることがより好ましく、800mW/cm以上であることが更に好ましく、1000mW/cm以上であることが更により好ましい。露光照度の上限は、10W/cm以下であることが好ましく、7W/cm以下であることがより好ましく、5W/cm以下であることが更に好ましい。 The irradiation amount (exposure amount) is preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J / cm 2 , for example. The lower limit is more preferably 0.05 J / cm 2 or more, further preferably 0.2 J / cm 2 or more, further preferably 0.5 J / cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 0.8 J / cm 2. It is even more preferably cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 1.0 J / cm 2 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 2.0 J / cm 2 or less, and further preferably 1.5 J / cm 2 or less. The exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and is preferably 50 mW / cm 2 to 10 W / cm 2 , for example. The lower limit of the exposure illuminance is more preferably 500 mW / cm 2 or more, further preferably 800 mW / cm 2 or more, and even more preferably 1000 mW / cm 2 or more. The upper limit of the exposure illuminance is preferably 10 W / cm 2 or less, more preferably 7 W / cm 2 or less, and further preferably 5 W / cm 2 or less.
 露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度1W/cm、酸素濃度35体積%で照度2W/cmなどとすることができる。 The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to the oxygen concentration performed in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, or substantially). It may be exposed in an oxygen-free environment), or may be exposed in a high oxygen atmosphere (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume) in which the oxygen concentration exceeds 21% by volume. The oxygen concentration and the exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined with each other. For example, the oxygen concentration may be 10% by volume and the illuminance may be 1 W / cm 2 , and the oxygen concentration may be 35% by volume and the illuminance may be 2 W / cm 2 .
 また、波長350nmを超え380nm以下の光(好ましくはi線)を1J/cm以上の露光量で照射して露光することも好ましい。このように露光することにより、着色組成物層を充分に硬化させることができ、耐溶剤性などの特性に優れた画素を製造することができる。 It is also preferable to irradiate light (preferably i-line) having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and 380 nm or less with an exposure amount of 1 J / cm 2 or more for exposure. By such exposure, the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured, and pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance can be produced.
 次に、露光後の着色組成物層を現像する。すなわち、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the colored composition layer after exposure is developed. That is, the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer is developed and removed to form a pattern (pixel). The development and removal of the unexposed portion of the coloring composition layer can be performed using a developing solution. As a result, the colored composition layer of the unexposed portion in the exposure step is eluted in the developing solution, and only the photocured portion remains. The temperature of the developer is preferably, for example, 20 to 30 ° C. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the steps of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液としては、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液であることが好ましい。アルカリ現像液としては、アルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液(アルカリ現像液)が好ましい。アルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物や、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。アルカリ剤は、分子量が大きい化合物の方が環境面および安全面で好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液は、さらに界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。界面活性剤としては、上述した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。現像液は、移送や保管の便宜などの観点より、一旦濃縮液として製造し、使用時に必要な濃度に希釈してもよい。希釈倍率は特に限定されないが、例えば1.5~100倍の範囲に設定することができる。また、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することも好ましい。また、リンスは、現像後の着色組成物層が形成された支持体を回転させつつ、現像後の着色組成物層へリンス液を供給して行うことが好ましい。また、リンス液を吐出させるノズルを支持体の中心部から支持体の周縁部に移動させて行うことも好ましい。この際、ノズルの支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させるにあたり、ノズルの移動速度を徐々に低下させながら移動させてもよい。このようにしてリンスを行うことで、リンスの面内ばらつきを抑制できる。また、ノズルを支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させつつ、支持体の回転速度を徐々に低下させても同様の効果が得られる。 Examples of the developing solution include organic solvents and alkaline developing solutions, and alkaline developing solutions are preferable. As the alkaline developer, an alkaline aqueous solution (alkaline developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable. Examples of the alkaline agent include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxyamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide. , Ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene, etc. Examples thereof include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate. As the alkaline agent, a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable in terms of environment and safety. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Further, the developer may further contain a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include the above-mentioned surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable. From the viewpoint of convenience of transfer and storage, the developer may be once produced as a concentrated solution and diluted to a concentration required for use. The dilution ratio is not particularly limited, but can be set in the range of, for example, 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Further, it is preferable that the rinsing is performed by supplying the rinsing liquid to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinse liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral edge of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion, the nozzle may be moved while gradually reducing the moving speed. By rinsing in this way, in-plane variation of the rinse can be suppressed. Further, the same effect can be obtained by gradually reducing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことも好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。 It is also preferable to perform additional exposure treatment or heat treatment (post-baking) after development and drying. Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments to complete the curing.
 ポストベークを行う場合、加熱温度は150℃以下が好ましい。加熱温度の上限は、120℃以下がより好ましく、100℃以下がさらに好ましい。加熱温度の下限は、組成物の硬化を促進できれば特に制限されないが、50℃以上がより好ましく、75℃以上がさらに好ましい。加熱時間は1分以上が好ましく、5分以上がより好ましく、10分以上がさらに好ましい。上限は特に限定はないが、生産性の観点から20分以下が好ましい。ポストベークは、不活性ガスの雰囲気下で行うことも好ましい。この態様によれば、熱重合を、酸素に阻害されることなく、非常に高い効率で進行させることができ、全工程を通じて120℃以下の温度で画素を製造した場合であっても、平坦性が良好で、耐溶剤性などの特性に優れた画素を製造することができる。不活性ガスとしては、窒素ガス、アルゴンガス、ヘリウムガス等が挙げられ、窒素ガスであることが好ましい。ポストベーク時の酸素濃度は、100ppm以下であることが好ましい。 When post-baking, the heating temperature is preferably 150 ° C or less. The upper limit of the heating temperature is more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, further preferably 100 ° C. or lower. The lower limit of the heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it can promote the curing of the composition, but is more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, further preferably 75 ° C. or higher. The heating time is preferably 1 minute or longer, more preferably 5 minutes or longer, and even more preferably 10 minutes or longer. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but 20 minutes or less is preferable from the viewpoint of productivity. Post-baking is also preferably carried out in an atmosphere of an inert gas. According to this aspect, thermal polymerization can proceed with very high efficiency without being hindered by oxygen, and even when pixels are manufactured at a temperature of 120 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process, flatness is achieved. It is possible to manufacture pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance. Examples of the inert gas include nitrogen gas, argon gas, helium gas and the like, and nitrogen gas is preferable. The oxygen concentration at the time of post-baking is preferably 100 ppm or less.
 追加露光処理を行う場合、波長254~350nmの光を照射して露光することが好ましい。より好ましい態様としては、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程(現像前の露光)は、着色組成物層に対して波長350nmを超え380nm以下の光(好ましくは波長355~370nmの光、より好ましくはi線)を照射して露光を行い、追加露光処理(現像後の露光)は、現像後の着色組成物層に対して、波長254~350nmの光(好ましくは波長254nmの光)を照射して露光することが好ましい。この態様によれば、最初の露光(現像前の露光)で着色組成物層を適度に硬化させることができ、次の露光(現像後の露光)で着色組成物層全体をほぼ完全に硬化させることができるので、結果として、低温条件でも、着色組成物層を充分に硬化させて、耐溶剤性、密着性および矩形性などの特性に優れた画素を形成することができる。このように2段階で露光を行う場合、着色組成物は、光重合開始剤として、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A1と、メタノール中での波長365nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以下で、かつ、波長254nmの吸光係数が1.0×10mL/gcm以上の光重合開始剤A2とを含むものを用いることが好ましい。 When performing the additional exposure processing, it is preferable to irradiate with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm for exposure. In a more preferred embodiment, the step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern (exposure before development) involves light having a wavelength of more than 350 nm and 380 nm or less (preferably light having a wavelength of 355 to 370 nm) with respect to the colored composition layer. The exposure is performed by irradiating (more preferably i-line), and the additional exposure treatment (exposure after development) is performed with respect to the developed colored composition layer with light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm (preferably light having a wavelength of 254 nm). It is preferable to irradiate and expose. According to this aspect, the coloring composition layer can be appropriately cured by the first exposure (exposure before development), and the entire coloring composition layer is cured almost completely by the next exposure (exposure after development). As a result, the colored composition layer can be sufficiently cured even under low temperature conditions to form pixels having excellent properties such as solvent resistance, adhesion, and rectangularness. When the exposure is carried out in two steps as described above, the coloring composition comprises, as a photopolymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator A1 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more in a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol. It contains a photopolymerization initiator A2 having an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 2 mL / g cm or less at a wavelength of 365 nm in methanol and an extinction coefficient of 1.0 × 10 3 mL / g cm or more at a wavelength of 254 nm. Is preferably used.
 現像後の露光は、例えば紫外線フォトレジスト硬化装置を用いて行うことができる。紫外線フォトレジスト硬化装置からは、例えば波長254~350nmの光とともに、これ以外の光(例えばi線)が照射されてもよい。 Exposure after development can be performed using, for example, an ultraviolet photoresist curing device. The ultraviolet photoresist curing apparatus may irradiate light having a wavelength of 254 to 350 nm and other light (for example, i-line).
 また、追加露光処理を行う場合の露光源スペクトルとしては、連続スペクトルが好ましく、耐溶剤性及び基板との密着性の改善の観点から、現像前の露光と異なる分光スペクトル分布を有することが好ましく、例えば、下記の放射線を挙げることができる。中でも、耐溶剤性及び基板との密着性の改善をより高水準で達成できる点で、(b)、(c)が好ましい。また、(A)着色剤が染料を含む場合、染料は一般に紫外線又は短波長可視光線を吸収して光分解することがあるため、短波長側に高強度の成分がより少ない放射線(c)が好ましい。
 (a)現像前の露光と異なる分光スペクトル分布を有する放射線であって、波長313nm(j線)におけるピーク強度が、波長365nm(i線)におけるピーク強度に対して、1/6以上1/3未満である放射線。
 (b)現像前の露光と異なる分光スペクトル分布を有する放射線であって、波長313nm(j線)におけるピーク強度が、波長365nm(i線)におけるピーク強度に対して、1/3以上である放射線。なお、かかる波長313nmにおけるピーク強度の上限は特に制限されないが、波長365nmにおけるピーク強度より小さいことが好ましく、より好ましくは3/4以下である。
 (c)現像前の露光と異なる分光スペクトル分布を有する放射線であって、波長405nm(h線)及び波長436nm(g線)を含み、波長313nm(j線)及び波長365nm(i線)におけるピーク強度が、波長405nm(h線)のピーク強度及び波長436nm(g線)のピーク強度のうち、より小さいピーク強度に対して1/4以下、好ましくは1/10以下、更に好ましくは1/20である放射線。なお、かかる波長313nm(j線)及び波長365nm(i線)におけるピーク強度の下限は特に制限されない。
 この場合、現像前の露光は、波長365nm(i線)、波長405nm(h線)及び波長436nm(g線)を含む放射線であって、波長313nm(j線)におけるピーク強度が、波長365nm(i線)におけるピーク強度に対して1/6未満である放射線が好ましい。
Further, as the exposure source spectrum when the additional exposure process is performed, a continuous spectrum is preferable, and from the viewpoint of improving solvent resistance and adhesion to the substrate, it is preferable to have a spectral spectrum distribution different from that of the exposure before development. For example, the following radiation can be mentioned. Above all, (b) and (c) are preferable in that improvement of solvent resistance and adhesion to the substrate can be achieved at a higher level. Further, when the colorant (A) contains a dye, the dye generally absorbs ultraviolet rays or short-wavelength visible light and photodecomposes, so that radiation (c) having less high-intensity component is generated on the short-wavelength side. preferable.
(A) Radiation having a spectral spectral distribution different from that of the exposure before development, and the peak intensity at a wavelength of 313 nm (j line) is 1/6 or more and 1/3 of the peak intensity at a wavelength of 365 nm (i line). Radiation that is less than.
(B) Radiation having a spectral spectral distribution different from that of the exposure before development, in which the peak intensity at a wavelength of 313 nm (j line) is 1/3 or more of the peak intensity at a wavelength of 365 nm (i line). .. The upper limit of the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm is not particularly limited, but it is preferably smaller than the peak intensity at the wavelength of 365 nm, and more preferably 3/4 or less.
(C) Radiation having a spectral spectral distribution different from that of the exposure before development, including a wavelength of 405 nm (h line) and a wavelength of 436 nm (g line), and a peak at a wavelength of 313 nm (j line) and a wavelength of 365 nm (i line). The intensity is 1/4 or less, preferably 1/10 or less, more preferably 1/20 with respect to the smaller peak intensity of the peak intensity having a wavelength of 405 nm (h line) and the peak intensity having a wavelength of 436 nm (g line). Radiation that is. The lower limit of the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm (j line) and the wavelength of 365 nm (i line) is not particularly limited.
In this case, the exposure before development is radiation containing a wavelength of 365 nm (i line), a wavelength of 405 nm (h line) and a wavelength of 436 nm (g line), and the peak intensity at the wavelength of 313 nm (j line) is 365 nm (j line). Radiation that is less than 1/6 of the peak intensity in i-ray) is preferred.
 このような分光特性を示す放射線は、例えば、上記のような分光特性を示す光源を用いるか、又は高圧水銀灯から放射された放射線に紫外線カットフィルタやバンドバスフィルタを介して得ることができる。 Radiation exhibiting such spectral characteristics can be obtained, for example, by using a light source exhibiting the above spectral characteristics, or by using an ultraviolet cut filter or a band bus filter for radiation emitted from a high-pressure mercury lamp.
 現像後の露光での照射量(露光量)は、0.03~4.0J/cmが好ましく、0.05~3.5J/cmがより好ましい。現像前の露光で用いられる光の波長と、現像後の露光で用いられる光の波長の差は、200nm以下であることが好ましく、100~150nmであることがより好ましい。 The irradiation amount (exposure amount) in the exposure after development is preferably 0.03 to 4.0 J / cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 3.5 J / cm 2 . The difference between the wavelength of the light used in the exposure before development and the wavelength of the light used in the exposure after development is preferably 200 nm or less, and more preferably 100 to 150 nm.
<表示装置>
 本発明の表示装置は、上述した本発明の硬化膜を有する。表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Display device>
The display device of the present invention has the above-mentioned cured film of the present invention. Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescence display device. For details on the definition of display devices and the details of each display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1990)", "Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd.)" (Published in 1989) ”and so on. Further, the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd., published in 1994)". The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "next-generation liquid crystal display technology".
 有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置は、白色有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子からなる光源を有するものであってもよい。白色有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子としては、タンデム構造であることが好ましい。有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子のタンデム構造については、特開2003-045676号公報、三上明義監修、「有機EL技術開発の最前線-高輝度・高精度・長寿命化・ノウハウ集-」、技術情報協会、326~328ページ、2008年などに記載されている。有機EL素子が発光する白色光のスペクトルは、青色領域(430nm~485nm)、緑色領域(530nm~580nm)及び黄色領域(580nm~620nm)に強い極大発光ピークを有するものが好ましい。これらの発光ピークに加え更に赤色領域(650nm~700nm)に極大発光ピークを有するものがより好ましい。 The organic electroluminescence display device may have a light source composed of a white organic electroluminescence element. The white organic electroluminescence device preferably has a tandem structure. Regarding the tandem structure of organic electroluminescence elements, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-045676, supervised by Akiyoshi Mikami, "Frontiers of Organic EL Technology Development-High Brightness, High Precision, Long Life, Know-how Collection-", Technical Information Association It is described on pages 326 to 328, 2008 and the like. The spectrum of white light emitted by the organic EL element preferably has a strong maximum emission peak in a blue region (430 nm to 485 nm), a green region (530 nm to 580 nm), and a yellow region (580 nm to 620 nm). In addition to these emission peaks, those having a maximum emission peak in the red region (650 nm to 700 nm) are more preferable.
 また、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置は、カラーフィルタ上にレンズを有していてもよい。レンズの形状としては、光学系設計により導出された様々な形状をとることができ、例えば、凸形状、凹形状などが挙げられる。例えば凹形状(凹型レンズ)とすることで光の集光性を向上させやすい。また、レンズは、カラーフィルタと直接接していてもよく、レンズとカラーフィルタとの間に、密着層や平坦化層などの他の層を設けてもよい。また、レンズは、国際公開第2018/135189号に記載の態様にて配置して用いることもできる。 Further, the organic electroluminescence display device may have a lens on the color filter. As the shape of the lens, various shapes derived by the optical system design can be taken, and examples thereof include a convex shape and a concave shape. For example, it is easy to improve the light condensing property by making it a concave shape (concave lens). Further, the lens may be in direct contact with the color filter, or another layer such as an adhesion layer or a flattening layer may be provided between the lens and the color filter. The lens can also be arranged and used in the manner described in International Publication No. 2018/135189.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の着色組成物および硬化膜は、固体撮像素子に用いることもできる。固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の硬化膜を有し、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid image sensor>
The coloring composition and the cured film of the present invention can also be used for a solid-state image sensor. The configuration of the solid-state image sensor is not particularly limited as long as it has the cured film of the present invention and functions as a solid-state image sensor, and examples thereof include the following configurations.
 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタの画素は、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に埋め込まれていてもよい。この場合の隔壁の屈折率は、画素の屈折よりも低いことが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号、米国特許出願公開第2018/0040656号明細書に記載の装置が挙げられる。固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 On the substrate, there are a plurality of photodiodes constituting the light receiving area of a solid-state image pickup device (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.) and a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like. A device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the photodiode and the transfer electrode so as to have a light-shielding film in which only the light-receiving part of the photodiode is open, and to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the light-receiving part of the photodiode on the light-shielding film. And has a color filter on the device protective film. Further, a configuration having a condensing means (for example, a microlens or the like; the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective film under the color filter (near the substrate), a configuration having a condensing means on the color filter, and the like. There may be. Further, the pixels of the color filter may be embedded in a space partitioned by a partition wall, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the refractive index of the partition wall is preferably lower than that of the pixel. Examples of the image pickup apparatus having such a structure are described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179757, International Publication No. 2018/043654, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0040656. Equipment is mentioned. The image pickup device provided with the solid-state image pickup device can be used not only for a digital camera and an electronic device having an image pickup function (mobile phone or the like), but also for an in-vehicle camera or a surveillance camera.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。 The present invention will be specifically described below with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below.
<顔料分散液の調製>
(顔料分散液P-G1)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7(平均一次粒子径50nm)の10.40質量部と、顔料誘導体1の2.60質量部と、分散剤1の6.50質量部と、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)の80.50質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G1を調製した。
<Preparation of pigment dispersion>
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G1)
C. I. Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm) 10.40 parts by mass, Pigment Derivative 1 2.60 parts by mass, Dispersant 1 6.50 parts by mass, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 80 parts by mass. After mixing with .50 parts by mass, using zirconia beads with a diameter of 1 mm, disperse with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan) for 5 hours, and then filter with a filter with a pore size of 5 μm to disperse the pigment. Liquid P-G1 was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-G2)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン36の12.60質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.26質量部と、分散剤1の5.04質量部と、PGMEAの81.10質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G2を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G2)
C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 36, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G2.
(顔料分散液P-G3)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン58の12.60質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.26質量部と、分散剤1の5.04質量部と、PGMEAの81.10質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G3を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G3)
C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 58, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G3.
(顔料分散液P-G4)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン59の12.60質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.26質量部と、分散剤1の5.04質量部と、PGMEAの81.10質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G4を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G4)
C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G4.
(顔料分散液P-G5)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7(平均一次粒子径50nm)の10.40質量部と、顔料誘導体3の2.60質量部と、分散剤3の6.50質量部と、PGMEAの80.50質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G5を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G5)
C. I. 10.40 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 2.60 parts by mass of pigment derivative 3, 6.50 parts by mass of dispersant 3, and 80.50 parts by mass of PGMEA are mixed. Then, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G5. ..
(顔料分散液P-G6)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン59の12.60質量部と、顔料誘導体3の1.26質量部と、分散剤3の5.04質量部と、PGMEAの81.10質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G6を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G6)
C. I. After mixing 12.60 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 1.26 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 3, 5.04 parts by mass of Dispersant 3, and 81.10 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G6.
(顔料分散液P-G7)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7(平均一次粒子径50nm)の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G7を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G7)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), and 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4. After mixing with 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan) for 5 hours, and then filtered with a filter having a pore size of 5 μm. The pigment dispersion liquid P-G7 was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-G8)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン59の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G8を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-G8)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-G8. Was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-G9)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン7(平均一次粒子径50nm)の14質量部と、分散剤5の8.2質量部と、分散剤6の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの72.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G9を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-G9)
C. I. After mixing 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 7 (average primary particle diameter 50 nm), 8.2 parts by mass of Dispersant 5, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 6, and 72.5 parts by mass of PGMEA. Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-G9.
(顔料分散液P-G10)
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン59の14質量部と、分散剤5の8.2質量部と、分散剤6の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの72.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-G10を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-G10)
C. I. After mixing 14 parts by mass of Pigment Green 59, 8.2 parts by mass of Dispersant 5, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 6, and 72.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are obtained. After dispersing for 5 hours with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.), the pigment dispersion liquid PG10 was prepared by filtering with a filter having a pore size of 5 μm.
(顔料分散液P-Y1)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー150の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体2の1.2質量部と、分散剤2の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y1を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y1)
C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 2, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 2, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y1.
(顔料分散液P-Y2)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー129の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.2質量部と、分散剤1の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y2を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y2)
C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y2.
(顔料分散液P-Y3)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー139の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.2質量部と、分散剤1の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y3を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y3)
C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y3.
(顔料分散液P-Y4)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー185の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.2質量部と、分散剤1の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y4を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y4)
C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.2 parts by mass of Pigment Derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of Dispersant 1, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y4.
(顔料分散液P-Y5)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー185の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体3の1.2質量部と、分散剤3の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y5を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y5)
C. I. After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.2 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 3, 6.8 parts by mass of the dispersant 3, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm is used. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y5.
(顔料分散液P-Y6)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー185の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y6を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y6)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y6. Was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-Y7)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー129の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y7を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y7)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to obtain a pigment dispersion P-Y7. Was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-Y8)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー139の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y8を調製した。
(Pigment dispersion liquid P-Y8)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y8. Was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-Y9)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー150の14質量部と、ポリエチレンイミン(エポミンSP-003、(株)日本触媒製)の0.49質量部と、分散剤4の4.41質量部と、PGMEAの81.1質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y9を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y9)
C. I. 14 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 0.49 parts by mass of polyethyleneimine (Epomin SP-003, manufactured by Nippon Catalyst Co., Ltd.), 4.41 parts by mass of dispersant 4, and 81.1 parts by mass of PGMEA. After mixing with Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to obtain a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y9. Was prepared.
(顔料分散液P-Y10)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー185の12.25質量部と、顔料誘導体4の1.75質量部と、分散剤7の10質量部と、PGMEAの76質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y10を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y10)
C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 185, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y10.
(顔料分散液P-Y11)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー129の12.25質量部と、顔料誘導体4の1.75質量部と、分散剤7の10質量部と、PGMEAの76質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y11を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y11)
C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 129, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y11.
(顔料分散液P-Y12)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー139の12.25質量部と、顔料誘導体4の1.75質量部と、分散剤7の10質量部と、PGMEAの76質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y12を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y12)
C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 1.75 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of the dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm were used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y12.
(顔料分散液P-Y13)
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー150の12.25質量部と、顔料誘導体4の1.75質量部と、分散剤7の10質量部と、PGMEAの76質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y14を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y13)
C. I. After mixing 12.25 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 150, 1.75 parts by mass of pigment derivative 4, 10 parts by mass of dispersant 7, and 76 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm are used. , Eiger Mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y14.
(顔料分散液P-Y14)
 黄色顔料1の12.0質量部と、顔料誘導体1の1.2質量部と、分散剤8の6.8質量部と、PGMEAの80.0質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液P-Y14を調製した。
(Pigment Dispersion Liquid P-Y14)
After mixing 12.0 parts by mass of the yellow pigment 1, 1.2 parts by mass of the pigment derivative 1, 6.8 parts by mass of the dispersant 8, and 80.0 parts by mass of PGMEA, zirconia having a diameter of 1 mm is used. Using the beads, the pigment was dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid P-Y14.
 黄色顔料1:下記構造の化合物(イソインドリン化合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Yellow pigment 1: Compound with the following structure (isoindoline compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 顔料誘導体1:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 顔料誘導体2:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 顔料誘導体3:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Pigment derivative 1: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Pigment derivative 2: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Pigment derivative 3: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 顔料誘導体4:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Pigment derivative 4: A compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 分散剤1:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量24000、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 分散剤2:下記構造の樹脂
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 分散剤3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量21000、酸価36mgKOH/g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Dispersant 1: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 24000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value added to the side chain is the number of repeating units).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Dispersant 2: Resin with the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Dispersant 3: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value added to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight 21000, acid value 36 mgKOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 分散剤4:以下の方法で合成した樹脂。
 メチルメタクリレート50質量部、n-ブチルメタクリレート30質量部、t-ブチルメタクリレート20質量部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)45.4質量部を反応容器に仕込み、雰囲気ガスを窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を70℃に加熱して、3-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオール6質量部を添加して、さらにAIBN(アゾビスイソブチロニトリル)0.12質量部を加え、12時間反応させた。固形分測定により95%が反応したことを確認した。次に、ピロメリット酸無水物9.7質量部、PGMEA70.3質量部、触媒としてDBU(1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン)0.20質量部を追加し、120℃で7時間反応させた。酸価の測定で98%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを確認し反応を終了して、酸価43mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量9000の下記構造の樹脂を得た。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Dispersant 4: Resin synthesized by the following method.
50 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 30 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 20 parts by mass of t-butyl methacrylate and 45.4 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) were charged into the reaction vessel, and the atmosphere gas was replaced with nitrogen gas. The inside of the reaction vessel is heated to 70 ° C., 6 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol is added, and 0.12 parts by mass of AIBN (azobisisobutyronitrile) is further added, and the reaction is carried out for 12 hours. I let you. It was confirmed by solid content measurement that 95% had reacted. Next, 9.7 parts by mass of pyromellitic anhydride, 70.3 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.20 parts by mass of DBU (1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene) as a catalyst were added. , 120 ° C. for 7 hours. By measuring the acid value, it was confirmed that 98% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified, and the reaction was terminated to obtain a resin having an acid value of 43 mgKOH / g and a weight average molecular weight of 9000 as described below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 分散剤5:以下の方法で合成した樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
 ガス導入管、コンデンサー、攪拌翼、及び温度計を備え付けた反応槽に、メトキシプロピルアセテートの133質量部を仕込み、窒素置換しながら100℃に昇温した。滴下槽にN,N-ジメチルアミノエチルメタクリレートの40質量部、n-ブチルメタクリレートの160質量部、メトキシプロピルアセテートの61質量部、及び2,2’-アゾビス(2,4-ジメチルバレロニトリル)の6質量部を仕込み、均一になるまで攪拌した後、反応槽へ2時間かけて滴下し、その後同温度で3時間反応させ、アミン価61mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量8700の樹脂(3級アミノ基を有するビニル系樹脂)を得た。得られた樹脂にPGMEAを加えて固形分濃度を40質量%に調製して分散剤5を得た。
Dispersant 5: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method.
133 parts by mass of methoxypropyl acetate was charged into a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, a condenser, a stirring blade, and a thermometer, and the temperature was raised to 100 ° C. while substituting with nitrogen. 40 parts by mass of N, N-dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, 160 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 61 parts by mass of methoxypropyl acetate, and 2,2'-azobis (2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) in the dropping tank. After charging 6 parts by mass and stirring until uniform, the mixture was added dropwise to the reaction vessel over 2 hours and then reacted at the same temperature for 3 hours to produce a resin (tertiary amino group) having an amine value of 61 mgKOH / g and a weight average molecular weight of 8700. A vinyl-based resin having a above-mentioned substance) was obtained. PGMEA was added to the obtained resin to adjust the solid content concentration to 40% by mass to obtain a dispersant 5.
 分散剤6:以下の方法で合成した樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
 ガス導入管、温度、コンデンサー、攪拌機を備えた反応容器に、メタクリル酸の10質量部、メチルメタクリレートの20質量部、2-メトキシエチルメタクリレートの90質量部、tert-ブチルメタクリレートの40質量部、n-ブチルアクリレートの20質量部、tert-ブチルアクリレートの20質量部、PGMEAの50質量部を仕込み、窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を50℃に加熱し撹拌しながら、3-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオールの12質量部を添加した。90℃に昇温し、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリルの0.1質量部をPGEMAの90質量部に加えた溶液を添加しながら7時間反応した。不揮発分測定により単量体の95%が反応したことを確認した。次いでトリメリット酸無水物の35質量部、PGMEAの50質量部、触媒として1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンの0.4質量部を追加し、100℃で7時間反応させた。酸価の測定で98%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを確認して反応を終了させ、酸価62mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量9000の樹脂を得た。得られた樹脂にPGMEAを加えて固形分濃度を40質量%に調製して分散剤6を得た。
Dispersant 6: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method.
In a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, temperature, condenser, and stirrer, 10 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, 20 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 90 parts by mass of 2-methoxyethyl methacrylate, 40 parts by mass of tert-butyl methacrylate, n. -20 parts by mass of butyl acrylate, 20 parts by mass of tert-butyl acrylate, and 50 parts by mass of PGMEA were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. While heating the inside of the reaction vessel to 50 ° C. and stirring, 12 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol was added. The temperature was raised to 90 ° C., and the reaction was carried out for 7 hours while adding a solution in which 0.1 part by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was added to 90 parts by mass of PGEMA. It was confirmed by measuring the non-volatile content that 95% of the monomers reacted. Next, add 35 parts by mass of trimellitic acid anhydride, 50 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.4 part by mass of 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene as a catalyst, and add 7 at 100 ° C. Reacted for time. By measuring the acid value, it was confirmed that 98% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified, and the reaction was terminated to obtain a resin having an acid value of 62 mgKOH / g and a weight average molecular weight of 9000. PGMEA was added to the obtained resin to adjust the solid content concentration to 40% by mass to obtain a dispersant 6.
 分散剤7:以下の方法で合成した樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液。
 ガス導入管、温度、コンデンサー、攪拌機を備えた反応容器に、メタクリル酸の10質量部、メチルメタクリレートの90質量部、エチルアクリレートの60質量部、tert-ブチルアクリレートの40質量部、PGMEAの50質量部を仕込み、窒素ガスで置換した。反応容器内を50℃に加熱し撹拌しながら、3-メルカプト-1,2-プロパンジオールの12質量部を添加した。90℃に昇温し、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリルの0.1質量部をPGEMAの90質量部に加えた溶液を添加しながら7時間反応した。不揮発分測定により単量体の95%が反応したことを確認した。
次いでピロメリット酸無水物の19質量部、PGMEAの50質量部、触媒として1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンの0.4質量部を追加し、100℃で7時間反応させた。酸価の測定で98%以上の酸無水物がハーフエステル化していることを確認して反応を終了させ、酸価70mgKOH/g、重量平均分子量10000の樹脂を得た。得られた樹脂にPGMEAを加えて固形分濃度を40質量%に調製して分散剤7を得た。
Dispersant 7: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of the resin synthesized by the following method.
10 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, 90 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate, 60 parts by mass of ethyl acrylate, 40 parts by mass of tert-butyl acrylate, 50 parts by mass of PGMEA in a reaction vessel equipped with a gas introduction tube, temperature, condenser and stirrer. The parts were charged and replaced with nitrogen gas. While heating the inside of the reaction vessel to 50 ° C. and stirring, 12 parts by mass of 3-mercapto-1,2-propanediol was added. The temperature was raised to 90 ° C., and the reaction was carried out for 7 hours while adding a solution in which 0.1 part by mass of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile was added to 90 parts by mass of PGEMA. It was confirmed by measuring the non-volatile content that 95% of the monomers reacted.
Next, 19 parts by mass of pyromellitic anhydride, 50 parts by mass of PGMEA, and 0.4 part by mass of 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene as a catalyst were added, and 7 at 100 ° C. Reacted for time. By measuring the acid value, it was confirmed that 98% or more of the acid anhydride was half-esterified, and the reaction was terminated to obtain a resin having an acid value of 70 mgKOH / g and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000. PGMEA was added to the obtained resin to adjust the solid content concentration to 40% by mass to obtain a dispersant 7.
 分散剤8:BYK-LPN6919(ビックケミー社製) Dispersant 8: BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by Big Chemie)
<着色組成物の調製>
 下記表に示す原料を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)を用いてろ過して着色組成物を調製した。
<Preparation of coloring composition>
The raw materials shown in the table below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered using a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to prepare a colored composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
 上記表中、略語で記載した原料は以下の通りである。
(顔料分散液)
 P-G1~P-G10、P-Y1~P-Y14:上述の顔料分散液P-G1~P-G10、P-Y1~P-Y14
In the above table, the raw materials described by abbreviations are as follows.
(Pigment dispersion)
P-G1 to P-G10, P-Y1 to P-Y14: The above-mentioned pigment dispersions P-G1 to P-G10, P-Y1 to P-Y14.
(光重合開始剤)
 I1:Irgacure OXE02(BASF社製、オキシム化合物)
 I2:Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製、ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン化合物)
 I3:Omnirad 379(IGM Resins B.V.社製、アミノアルキルフェノン化合物)
 I4:下記構造の化合物(オキシム化合物)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 I5:Irgacure OXE01(BASF社製、オキシム化合物)
(Photopolymerization initiator)
I1: Irgure OXE02 (Oxime compound manufactured by BASF)
I2: Omnirad 2959 (hydroxyalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
I3: Omnirad 379 (aminoalkylphenone compound manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
I4: Compound with the following structure (oxime compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
I5: Irgure OXE01 (Oxime compound manufactured by BASF)
(環状エーテル基を有する化合物)
 E1:EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製、下記構造のエポキシ樹脂、環状エーテル基の含有量5.70mmol/g、重量平均分子量2282、n=15、R=C13
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 E2:EPICLON N-695(DIC(株)製、下記構造のクレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、環状エーテル基の含有量4.74mmol/g、重量平均分子量3583、n=18)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
(Compound having a cyclic ether group)
E1: EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation, epoxy resin having the following structure, content of cyclic ether group 5.70 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 2482, n = 15, R = C 6 H 13 O 2 )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
E2: EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, cresol novolac type epoxy resin having the following structure, content of cyclic ether group 4.74 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 3583, n = 18)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 E3:下記構造のエポキシ樹脂(環状エーテル基の含有量5.33mmol/g、重量平均分子量11000)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
E3: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 5.33 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 11000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 E4:下記構造のエポキシ樹脂(環状エーテル基の含有量3.95mmol/g、重量平均分子量10000)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
E4: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 3.95 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 10000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 E5:下記構造のエポキシ樹脂(環状エーテル基の含有量5.33mmol/g、重量平均分子量10000)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
E5: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 5.33 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 10000)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 E6:以下の方法で合成したエポキシ樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液
 反応容器にベンジルメタクリレート5.1質量部、N-フェニルマレイミド0.8質量部、スチレン0.6質量部、グリシジルメタクリレート13.2質量部をプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート78.9質量部と共に入れて溶かした後、窒素雰囲気で75℃に昇温した。反応物が75℃に到達した後、熱重合開始剤(V-65、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)1.2質量部を添加した後、12時間反応させた。このように得られた樹脂溶液に熱重合禁止剤と触媒を添加した後、メタクリル酸0.1質量部を空気雰囲気で投入し、120℃を維持して16時間反応させてエポキシ樹脂を合成した。このエポキシ樹脂の重量平均分子量は4500であり、分枝鎖末端がエポキシ基で置換された(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位の含有量は49モル%、分枝鎖末端がアルケニル基で置換された(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位の含有量は21モル%であった。
E6: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of epoxy resin synthesized by the following method 5.1 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 0.8 parts by mass of N-phenylmaleimide, 0.6 parts by mass of styrene, 13.2 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate in a reaction vessel. The portion was added together with 78.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol methyl ether acetate and dissolved, and then the temperature was raised to 75 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. After the reaction product reached 75 ° C., 1.2 parts by mass of a thermal polymerization initiator (V-65, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and then the reaction was carried out for 12 hours. After adding a thermal polymerization inhibitor and a catalyst to the resin solution thus obtained, 0.1 part by mass of methacrylic acid was added in an air atmosphere and reacted at 120 ° C. for 16 hours to synthesize an epoxy resin. .. The weight average molecular weight of this epoxy resin was 4500, the content of the repeating unit of the (meth) acrylic structure in which the end of the branched chain was replaced with an epoxy group was 49 mol%, and the end of the branched chain was replaced with an alkenyl group. The content of the repeating unit of the (meth) acrylic structure was 21 mol%.
 E7:以下の方法で合成したエポキシ樹脂の40質量%PGMEA溶液
 反応容器にベンジルメタクリレート5.1質量部、N-フェニルマレイミド0.8質量部、スチレン0.6質量部、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチルメタクリレート13.2質量部をプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート78.9質量部と共に入れて溶かした後、窒素雰囲気で75℃に昇温した。反応物が75℃に到達した後、熱重合開始剤(V-65、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)1.2質量部を添加した後、12時間反応させた。このように得られた樹脂溶液に熱重合禁止剤と触媒を添加した後、メタクリル酸0.1質量部を空気雰囲気で投入し、120℃を維持して16時間反応させてエポキシ樹脂を合成した。このエポキシ樹脂の重量平均分子量は4700であり、分枝鎖末端がエポキシ基で置換された(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位の含有量は49モル%、分枝鎖末端がアルケニル基で置換された(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位の含有量は21モル%であった。
E7: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of epoxy resin synthesized by the following method In a reaction vessel, 5.1 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 0.8 parts by mass of N-phenylmaleimide, 0.6 parts by mass of styrene, 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl 13.2 parts by mass of methylmethacrylate was added together with 78.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol methyl ether acetate to dissolve it, and then the temperature was raised to 75 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. After the reaction product reached 75 ° C., 1.2 parts by mass of a thermal polymerization initiator (V-65, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and then the reaction was carried out for 12 hours. After adding a thermal polymerization inhibitor and a catalyst to the resin solution thus obtained, 0.1 part by mass of methacrylic acid was added in an air atmosphere and reacted at 120 ° C. for 16 hours to synthesize an epoxy resin. .. The weight average molecular weight of this epoxy resin was 4700, the content of the repeating unit of the (meth) acrylic structure in which the end of the branched chain was substituted with an epoxy group was 49 mol%, and the end of the branched chain was substituted with an alkenyl group. The content of the repeating unit of the (meth) acrylic structure was 21 mol%.
 E8:デナコール EX-810(ナガセケムテックス(株)製、エチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、分子量174) E8: Denacol EX-810 (manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, molecular weight 174)
 E9:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量9200)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
E9: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of resin (weight average molecular weight 9200) having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 O1:OXT-221(東亞合成(株)製、3-エチル-3{[(3-エチルオキセタン-3-イル)メトキシ]メチル}オキセタン、オキセタニル基を有する化合物) O1: OXT-221 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., 3-ethyl-3 {[(3-ethyloxetane-3-yl) methoxy] methyl} oxetane, a compound having an oxetane group)
 O2:下記構造の樹脂(環状エーテル基の含有量3.83mmol/g、重量平均分子量9800)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
O2: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 3.83 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 9800)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
(重合性化合物)
 M1:アロニックス M-402(東亞合成(株)製、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレートとジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートの混合物)
 M2:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 M3:下記構造の化合物(a+b+c=3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 M4:下記構造の化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 M5:下記構造の化合物の混合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 M6:アロニックスM-350(東亞合成(株)製、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシド変性トリアクリレート)
(Polymerizable compound)
M1: Aronix M-402 (Mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
M2: Compound with the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
M3: Compound with the following structure (a + b + c = 3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
M4: Compound with the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
M5: Mixture of compounds with the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
M6: Aronix M-350 (Trimethylolpropane Ethylene Oxide Modified Triacrylate, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.)
(樹脂)
 B1:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量12000、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 B2:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量11000、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
(resin)
B1: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 12000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
B2: A 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 11000, the numerical value added to the main chain is the molar ratio).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
(界面活性剤)
 G1:BYK-330(ビックケミー社製、シリコーン系界面活性剤)
 G2:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量14000、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%の数値はモル%である、フッ素系界面活性剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
 G3:KF-6001(信越化学工業(株)製、シリコーン系界面活性剤)
 G4:トーレシリコーンSH8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)
(Surfactant)
G1: BYK-330 (Silicone-based surfactant manufactured by Big Chemie)
G2: A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight 14000,% value indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%, fluorine-based surfactant)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
G3: KF-6001 (Silicone-based surfactant manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
G4: Torre Silicone SH8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.)
(溶剤)
 S1:PGMEA
 S2:シクロヘキサノン
 S3:アニソール
 S4:ジアセトンアルコール
(solvent)
S1: PGMEA
S2: Cyclohexanone S3: Anisole S4: Diacetone alcohol
<評価> <Evaluation>
(分光特性の評価)
 各着色組成物を、スピンコーターを用いて、乾燥後の膜厚が1.5μmとなるようにガラス基板上に塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥させた。その後、超高圧水銀ランプを用いて、露光照度20mW/cm、露光量100mJ/cmの条件で露光した。次いで、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、放冷して、硬化膜を形成した。
 得られた硬化膜について、紫外可視近赤外分光光度計(UV3600、(株)島津製作所製)を用い、レファレンスをガラス基板として、波長300~800nmの範囲の光の吸光度を測定し、以下の波長1、波長2をそれぞれ測定した。
 波長1:波長400~700nmの波長の光に対する吸光度のうち、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる長波側の波長
 波長2:波長400~700nmの波長の光に対する吸光度のうち、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる短波側の波長
(Evaluation of spectral characteristics)
Each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 μm, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, the exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film.
The obtained cured film was measured for the absorbance of light in the wavelength range of 300 to 800 nm using an ultraviolet-visible near-infrared spectrophotometer (UV3600, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) using a reference as a glass substrate. Wavelength 1 and wavelength 2 were measured, respectively.
Wavelength 1: Of the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm, when the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 450 nm is 1, the wavelength on the long wave side where the absorptivity is 0.2 Wavelength 2: Light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm. Of the absorptivity for light, when the absorptivity for light with a wavelength of 450 nm is 1, the wavelength on the short wave side where the absorptivity is 0.2.
<混色の評価>
 スピンコーターを用いて、各着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚が1.5μmとなるようにガラス基板上に塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥させた。次いで、超高圧水銀ランプを用いて、露光照度20mW/cm、露光量100mJ/cmの条件で露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピン・シャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した。そして、100℃のホットプレート上で20分間加熱し、放冷して、硬化膜を形成した。MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して、得られた硬化膜の波長450nmの光の透過率(T1)を測定した。
 次に、この硬化膜上に、混色評価用の着色組成物を乾燥後の膜厚が1.5μmとなるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、100℃のホットプレート上で2分間乾燥して混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を形成し、積層膜を形成した。混色評価用の着色組成物には、後述する実施例1001の青色画素の形成に用いた青色画素形成用着色組成物1を使用した。
 次いで、この積層膜が形成されたガラス基板をスピン・シャワー現像機(DW-30型、(株)ケミトロニクス製)の水平回転テーブル上に載置し、CD-2000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)の60%希釈液を用いて23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行い、硬化膜上に形成された混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を現像除去した。次いで、前述のガラス基板を真空チャック方式で水平回転テーブルに固定し、回転装置によってガラス基板を回転数50rpmで回転させつつ、その回転中心の上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理を行い、その後スプレー乾燥した。
 MCPD-3000(大塚電子(株)製)を使用して、混色評価用の着色組成物の塗膜を現像除去した後の上記硬化膜の波長450nmの光の透過率(T2)を測定した。
 下記式から透過率の変化率を算出し、下記評価基準に従って混色を評価した。
 透過率の変化率(%)={|透過率(T1)-透過率(T2)|/透過率(T1)}×100
 S:透過率の変化率が0.1%未満である
 A:透過率の変化率が0.1%以上0.25%未満である
 B:透過率の変化率が0.25%以上1%未満である
 C:透過率の変化率が1%以上2.5%未満である
 D:透過率の変化率が2.5%以上5%未満である
 E:透過率の変化率が5%以上である
<Evaluation of color mixing>
Using a spin coater, each coloring composition was applied onto a glass substrate so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 μm, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Then, using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, exposure was performed under the conditions of an exposure illuminance of 20 mW / cm 2 and an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 . Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, it was heated on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes and allowed to cool to form a cured film. Using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), the transmittance (T1) of the obtained cured film having a wavelength of 450 nm was measured.
Next, the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was applied onto this cured film using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 1.5 μm, and dried on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. A coating film of a coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was formed, and a laminated film was formed. As the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation, the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels used for forming the blue pixels of Example 1001 described later was used.
Next, the glass substrate on which this laminated film was formed was placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developer (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fujifilm Electronics Materials Co., Ltd.) Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 60% diluted solution (manufactured by Co., Ltd.), and the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation formed on the cured film was developed and removed. Next, the above-mentioned glass substrate is fixed to a horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and while the glass substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, pure water is supplied from above the center of rotation in a shower shape from above the center of rotation. It was rinsed and then spray dried.
Using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), the transmittance (T2) of light having a wavelength of 450 nm of the cured film after the coating film of the coloring composition for color mixing evaluation was developed and removed was measured.
The rate of change in transmittance was calculated from the following formula, and the color mixing was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
Change rate of transmittance (%) = {| Transmittance (T1) -Transmittance (T2) | / Transmittance (T1)} x 100
S: The change rate of the transmittance is less than 0.1% A: The change rate of the transmittance is 0.1% or more and less than 0.25% B: The change rate of the transmittance is 0.25% or more and 1% Less than C: Transmittance change rate is 1% or more and less than 2.5% D: Transmittance change rate is 2.5% or more and less than 5% E: Transmittance change rate is 5% or more Is
(保存安定性の評価)
 上記で得られた製造直後の着色組成物の粘度(V)を、東機産業(株)製「RE-85L」にて測定した。この着色組成物を40℃の温度条件のもとで3日間静置した後、粘度(V)を測定した。下記式から増粘率を算出し、下記評価基準に従って保存安定性を評価した。着色組成物の粘度は23℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定した。評価基準は下記の通りとし、評価結果は下記表に記載した。
 増粘率(%)=[(粘度(V)-粘度(V))/粘度(V)]×100
 S:増粘率が0.1%未満である
 A:増粘率が0.1%以上0.25%未満である
 B:増粘率が0.25%以上1%未満である
 C:増粘率が1%以上2.5%未満である
 D:増粘率が2.5%以上5%未満である
 E:増粘率が5%以上である
(Evaluation of storage stability)
The viscosity (V 1 ) of the coloring composition immediately after production obtained above was measured with "RE-85L" manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. The coloring composition was allowed to stand for 3 days under a temperature condition of 40 ° C., and then the viscosity (V 2 ) was measured. The thickening rate was calculated from the following formula, and the storage stability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The viscosity of the coloring composition was measured in a state where the temperature was adjusted to 23 ° C. The evaluation criteria are as follows, and the evaluation results are shown in the table below.
Thickness increase rate (%) = [(viscosity (V 2 ) -viscosity (V 1 )) / viscosity (V 1 )] × 100
S: The thickening rate is less than 0.1% A: The thickening rate is 0.1% or more and less than 0.25% B: The thickening rate is 0.25% or more and less than 1% C: Increased The viscosity is 1% or more and less than 2.5%. D: The viscosity is 2.5% or more and less than 5%. E: The viscosity is 5% or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
 上記表に示すように、実施例は比較例よりも混色の評価が優れていた。また、実施例の着色組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜は、波長500nm近傍の光の透過率が高く、緑色の画素として感度が優れていた。
 実施例1の界面活性剤を界面活性剤(KF-6001、信越化学工業社製)に変えても同様の効果が得られた。
As shown in the above table, the examples were superior to the comparative examples in the evaluation of color mixing. Further, the cured film obtained by using the coloring composition of the example had a high transmittance of light in the vicinity of a wavelength of 500 nm, and was excellent in sensitivity as a green pixel.
The same effect was obtained even when the surfactant of Example 1 was changed to a surfactant (KF-6001, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.).
(実施例1001)
 シリコンウエハ上に、緑色画素形成用着色組成物を製膜後の膜厚が1.5μmになるようにスピンコート法で塗布した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、100℃で2分間加熱した。次いで、i線ステッパー露光装置FPA-3000i5+(キヤノン(株)製)を用い、200mJ/cmで3μm四方のドットパターンのマスクを介して露光した。次いで、水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピン・シャワーにてリンスを行い、更に純水にて水洗した。次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、100℃で20分間加熱することで、緑色の着色パターン(緑色画素)を形成した。同様に赤色画素形成用着色組成物1、青色画素形成用着色組成物1を順次パターニングし、赤色の着色パターン(赤色画素)、青色の着色パターン(青色画素)をそれぞれ形成して構造体を形成した。緑色画素形成用着色組成物としては、実施例1の着色組成物を使用した。赤色画素形成用着色組成物1、青色画素形成用着色組成物1については後述する。得られた構造体を公知の方法に従い有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置に組み込んだ。この有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置は好適な画像認識能を有していた。
(Example 1001)
A coloring composition for forming green pixels was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coating method so that the film thickness after film formation was 1.5 μm. Then, using a hot plate, it was heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. Next, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at 200 mJ / cm 2 via a mask with a 3 μm square dot pattern. Then, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Then, it was rinsed with a spin shower and then washed with pure water. Then, a green coloring pattern (green pixel) was formed by heating at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes using a hot plate. Similarly, the coloring composition 1 for forming red pixels and the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels are sequentially patterned to form a red coloring pattern (red pixel) and a blue coloring pattern (blue pixel), respectively, to form a structure. did. As the coloring composition for forming green pixels, the coloring composition of Example 1 was used. The coloring composition 1 for forming red pixels and the coloring composition 1 for forming blue pixels will be described later. The obtained structure was incorporated into an organic electroluminescence display device according to a known method. This organic electroluminescence display device had suitable image recognition ability.
[赤色画素形成用着色組成物1]
 下記組成の混合物を均一になるように撹拌混合した後、1.0μmのフィルタで濾過し、赤色画素形成用着色組成物1を作製した。
 顔料分散液DR-1  ・・・30.2質量部
 顔料分散液DY-1  ・・・8.4質量部
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物1  ・・・15.2質量部
 重合性化合物(アロニックス M-402、東亞合成(株)製)  ・・・0.7質量部
 光重合開始剤(Irgacure OXE02、BASF社製)  ・・・0.3質量部
 PGMEA  ・・・44.2質量部
[Coloring Composition for Forming Red Pixels 1]
The mixture having the following composition was stirred and mixed so as to be uniform, and then filtered through a 1.0 μm filter to prepare a colored composition 1 for forming a red pixel.
Pigment dispersion DR-1 ・ ・ ・ 30.2 parts by mass Pigment dispersion DY-1 ・ ・ ・ 8.4 parts by mass Compound having a cyclic ether group 1 ・ ・ ・ 15.2 parts by mass Polymerizable compound (Aronix M- 402, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) ・ ・ ・ 0.7 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE02, manufactured by BASF) ・ ・ ・ 0.3 parts by mass PGMEA ・ ・ ・ 44.2 parts by mass
[青色画素形成用着色組成物1]
 下記組成の混合物を均一になるように撹拌混合した後、1.0μmのフィルタで濾過し、青色画素形成用着色組成物1を作製した。
 顔料分散液DB-1  ・・・10.4質量部
 顔料分散液DV-1  ・・・6.1質量部
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物1  ・・・24.2質量部
 重合性化合物(アロニックス M-402、東亞合成(株)製)  ・・・0.7質量部
 光重合開始剤(Irgacure OXE02、BASF社製)  ・・・0.3質量部
 PGMEA  ・・・44.2質量部
[Coloring Composition for Forming Blue Pixels 1]
The mixture having the following composition was stirred and mixed so as to be uniform, and then filtered through a 1.0 μm filter to prepare a colored composition 1 for forming blue pixels.
Pigment dispersion DB-1 ・ ・ ・ 10.4 parts by mass Pigment dispersion DV-1 ・ ・ ・ 6.1 parts by mass Compound 1 ・ ・ ・ 24.2 parts by mass Polymerizable compound (Aronix M- 402, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) ・ ・ ・ 0.7 parts by mass Photopolymerization initiator (Irgacure OXE02, manufactured by BASF) ・ ・ ・ 0.3 parts by mass PGMEA ・ ・ ・ 44.2 parts by mass
 顔料分散液DR-1は、以下の方法で調製したものを用いた。
 C.I.ピグメントレッド264の11.0質量部と、分散剤11の21.5質量部と、分散剤(BASF社製、EFKA4300)の1質量部と、PGMEAの66.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液DR-1を調製した。
As the pigment dispersion liquid DR-1, the one prepared by the following method was used.
C. I. After mixing 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Red 264, 21.5 parts by mass of the dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of the dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DR-1.
 顔料分散液DY-1は、以下の方法で調製したものを用いた。
 C.I.ピグメントイエロー139の23.5質量部と、分散剤11の7質量部と、分散剤(BASF社製、EFKA4300)の3質量部と、PGMEAの66.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液DY-1を調製した。
As the pigment dispersion liquid DY-1, the one prepared by the following method was used.
C. I. After mixing 23.5 parts by mass of Pigment Yellow 139, 7 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 3 parts by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, the diameter is 1 mm. The zirconia beads of No. 1 were dispersed in an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DY-1.
 顔料分散液DB-1は、以下の方法で調製したものを用いた。
 C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6の11.0質量部と、分散剤11の21.5質量部と、分散剤(BASF社製、EFKA4300)の1質量部と、PGMEAの66.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液DB-1を調製した。
As the pigment dispersion liquid DB-1, the one prepared by the following method was used.
C. I. 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Blue 15: 6, 21.5 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300, manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA were mixed. Then, using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered with a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DB-1.
 顔料分散液DV-1は、以下の方法で調製したものを用いた。
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23の11.0質量部と、分散剤11の21.5質量部と、分散剤(BASF社製、EFKA4300)の1質量部と、PGMEAの66.5質量部とを混合した後、直径1mmのジルコニアビーズを用いて、アイガーミル(アイガージャパン社製「ミニモデルM-250MKII」)で5時間分散した後、孔径5μmのフィルタで濾過して顔料分散液DV-1を調製した。
As the pigment dispersion liquid DV-1, the one prepared by the following method was used.
C. I. After mixing 11.0 parts by mass of Pigment Violet 23, 21.5 parts by mass of dispersant 11, 1 part by mass of dispersant (EFKA4300 manufactured by BASF), and 66.5 parts by mass of PGMEA, Using zirconia beads having a diameter of 1 mm, the mixture was dispersed with an Eiger mill (“Mini Model M-250MKII” manufactured by Eiger Japan Co., Ltd.) for 5 hours, and then filtered through a filter having a pore size of 5 μm to prepare a pigment dispersion liquid DV-1.
 分散剤11は、以下の方法で調製したものを用いた。
 セパラブル4口フラスコに温度計、冷却管、窒素ガス導入管、滴下管および撹拌装置を取り付けた反応容器にPGMEAの196質量部を仕込み、80℃に昇温し、反応容器内を窒素置換した後、滴下管より、n-ブチルメタクリレート37.2質量部、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート12.9質量部、メタクリル酸12.0質量部、パラクミルフェノールエチレンオキサイド変性アクリレート(東亞合成(株)製、アロニックスM110)20.7質量部、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル1.1質量部の混合物を2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、更に3時間反応を継続し、樹脂(Mw=30000)を得た。室温まで冷却した後、PGMEAで希釈して固形分濃度を20質量%に調整し、分散剤11を調製した。
As the dispersant 11, those prepared by the following methods were used.
After charging 196 parts by mass of PGMEA into a reaction vessel equipped with a thermometer, a cooling tube, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a dropping tube and a stirrer in a separable 4-neck flask, the temperature was raised to 80 ° C., and the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with nitrogen. , 37.2 parts by mass of n-butyl methacrylate, 12.9 parts by mass of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 12.0 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, paracumylphenol ethylene oxide-modified acrylate (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd., Aronix) M110) A mixture of 20.7 parts by mass and 1,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile 1.1 parts by mass was added dropwise over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the reaction was continued for another 3 hours to obtain a resin (Mw = 30,000). After cooling to room temperature, the dispersant 11 was prepared by diluting with PGMEA to adjust the solid content concentration to 20% by mass.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物1には、下記構造のエポキシ樹脂(環状エーテル基の含有量5.33mmol/g、重量平均分子量11000)の40質量%PGMEA溶液を用いた。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
As the compound 1 having a cyclic ether group, a 40% by mass PGMEA solution of an epoxy resin having the following structure (content of cyclic ether group 5.33 mmol / g, weight average molecular weight 11000) was used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066

Claims (17)

  1.  着色剤と、樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤と、環状エーテル基を有する化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
     前記着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7と、黄色着色剤と、を含み、 前記着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲に存在する、
     着色組成物。
    A coloring composition containing a colorant, a resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a compound having a cyclic ether group.
    The colorant contains a color index pigment green 7 and a yellow colorant, and the coloring composition has a wavelength of 540 nm or more and 610 nm at which the absorbance is 0.2 when the absorbance with respect to light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. Exists in the following wavelength range,
    Coloring composition.
  2.  前記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、重量平均分子量が1500以上の化合物を含む、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 1500 or more.
  3.  前記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位を含む化合物を含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound containing a repeating unit having a cyclic ether group.
  4.  前記環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位、ノボラック構造の繰り返し単位、または、(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位である、請求項3に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to claim 3, wherein the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group is a repeating unit having a polyether structure, a repeating unit having a novolak structure, or a repeating unit having a (meth) acrylic structure.
  5.  前記環状エーテル基を有する繰り返し単位は、主鎖構造中に脂肪族炭化水素環を含む、請求項3または4に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the repeating unit having a cyclic ether group contains an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring in the main chain structure.
  6.  前記環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物とオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを含む、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the compound having a cyclic ether group contains a compound having an epoxy group and a compound having an oxetanyl group.
  7.  前記着色組成物の全固形分中における前記環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量が1質量%以上である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 1% by mass or more.
  8.  前記着色組成物は、波長450nmの光に対する吸光度を1としたとき、吸光度が0.2となる波長が470nm以上520nm以下の波長範囲と、540nm以上610nm以下の波長範囲のそれぞれに存在する、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition is claimed to be present in each of a wavelength range in which the absorbance at 0.2 is 470 nm or more and 520 nm or less and a wavelength range in which 540 nm or more and 610 nm or less, respectively, when the absorbance for light having a wavelength of 450 nm is 1. Item 2. The coloring composition according to any one of Items 1 to 7.
  9.  カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン7の100質量部に対して黄色着色剤を25~600質量部含有する、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which contains 25 to 600 parts by mass of a yellow colorant with respect to 100 parts by mass of Color Index Pigment Green 7.
  10.  前記黄色着色剤は、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー129、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー139、カラーインデックスピグメントイエロー150およびカラーインデックスピグメントイエロー185から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The yellow colorant according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the yellow colorant comprises at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Yellow 129, Color Index Pigment Yellow 139, Color Index Pigment Yellow 150 and Color Index Pigment Yellow 185. Coloring composition.
  11.  前記着色剤は、更に、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン36、カラーインデックスピグメントグリーン58およびカラーインデックスピグメントグリーン59から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, further comprising at least one selected from Color Index Pigment Green 36, Color Index Pigment Green 58 and Color Index Pigment Green 59.
  12.  前記着色組成物の全固形分中における前記着色剤の含有量が15質量%以上である、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is 15% by mass or more.
  13.  全工程を通じて150℃以下の温度で硬化膜を形成するために用いられる、請求項1~12のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 12, which is used for forming a cured film at a temperature of 150 ° C. or lower throughout the entire process.
  14.  請求項1~13のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜。 A cured film obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  15.  緑色画素と赤色画素と青色画素とを有する構造体であって、前記緑色画素は請求項1~13のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて得られるものである、構造体。 A structure having a green pixel, a red pixel, and a blue pixel, wherein the green pixel is obtained by using the coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
  16.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を有するカラーフィルタ。 The color filter having the cured film according to claim 14.
  17.  請求項14に記載の硬化膜を有する表示装置。 A display device having the cured film according to claim 14.
PCT/JP2021/030326 2020-09-24 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device WO2022064904A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180062346.2A CN116249938A (en) 2020-09-24 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, cured film, structure, color filter, and display device
JP2022551196A JPWO2022064904A1 (en) 2020-09-24 2021-08-19

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-159260 2020-09-24
JP2020159260 2020-09-24
JP2021000406 2021-01-05
JP2021-000406 2021-01-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022064904A1 true WO2022064904A1 (en) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80845102

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/030326 WO2022064904A1 (en) 2020-09-24 2021-08-19 Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022064904A1 (en)
CN (1) CN116249938A (en)
TW (1) TW202212493A (en)
WO (1) WO2022064904A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019113823A (en) * 2017-12-22 2019-07-11 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition and color filter
JP2019139230A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-22 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition and color filter
JP2020101575A (en) * 2018-12-19 2020-07-02 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter, solid state imaging device, and liquid crystal display

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019113823A (en) * 2017-12-22 2019-07-11 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition and color filter
JP2019139230A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-22 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition and color filter
JP2020101575A (en) * 2018-12-19 2020-07-02 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition, color filter, solid state imaging device, and liquid crystal display

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022064904A1 (en) 2022-03-31
CN116249938A (en) 2023-06-09
TW202212493A (en) 2022-04-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022202204A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2024009929A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
WO2023008352A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
WO2022168741A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023243414A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023136028A1 (en) Colored composition, film, structure, color filter, and display device
JP7376609B2 (en) Colored compositions, cured films, structures, color filters and display devices
JP7376617B2 (en) Color filter, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state image sensor and display device
JP7301989B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter and display device
WO2022168742A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2022196450A1 (en) Colored composition, method for producing film, method for producing color filter, method for producing solid imaging element, and method for producing image display device
KR102668934B1 (en) Coloring compositions, cured films, structures, color filters and display devices
JP2022119701A (en) Photosensitive composition, method for producing photosensitive composition, film, optical filter, solid state image sensor and image display device
JP7169362B2 (en) Coloring composition, method for forming cured film, method for producing color filter, and method for producing display device
WO2022044616A1 (en) Photosensitive composition, optical filter manufacturing method, and solid image pickup element manufacturing method
WO2022064904A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, structure body, color filter, and display device
WO2022044972A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device
WO2022080046A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, optical sensor, and display device
WO2022196401A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, and display device
WO2022044650A1 (en) Coloring composition, method for producing optical filter, and method for producing solid-state imaging element
WO2022024970A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023100585A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, display device, and structural body
WO2023228791A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2022181158A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter and solid-state imaging device
WO2022085496A1 (en) Resin composition, method for producing film, method for producing optical filter, method for producing solid imaging element, and method for producing image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21872036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022551196

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21872036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1